Skip Headers
Oracle® Beehive Administrator's Reference Guide
Release 2 (2.0.1.8)

Part Number E16649-04
Go to Documentation Home
Home
Go to Book List
Book List
Go to Table of Contents
Contents
Go to Feedback page
Contact Us

Go to previous page
Previous
Go to next page
Next
PDF · Mobi · ePub

2 Oracle Beehive Command Line Utility

This module contains instructions on the usage and syntax for all commands shipped with the Oracle Beehive beectl utility. The utility is installed in the $ORACLE_HOME/beehive/bin directory.

The Oracle Beehive beectl utility is always used in conjunction with a qualifying command. This module contains instructions about each command, and its available options. When running a beectl command, the following syntax should be used:

beectl command --option <argument>      

Where command represents the beectl command, --option represents an available option(s) to use with the command, and <argument> represents a valid argument passed with an option.

Using beectl Commands in Shell Mode Without Authentication

The beectl commands can also be used in shell mode. To invoke the shell, run the beectl utility without any qualifying commands. The following shell prompt will be returned on the command-line:

beectl>

Once this prompt appears on the command-line, there is no need to specify beectl when using a command.

Note:

The beectl shell expires if inactive for more than 30 minutes.

Using beectl Commands in Shell Mode with Authentication

Many beectl commands require authentication using the --authuser and --authpassword options. To invoke the beectl shell with authenticated user credentials, use the following command in the beectl shell mode:

beectl> login --authuser <authuser> --authpassword <authpassword> -obfuscated

Where <authuser> represents the user with which to authenticate, and <authpassword> represents the obfuscated user password. For information about obfuscating a password, see the obfuscate command.

Execution Permissions of beectl

The following applies only to Linux and UNIX-based operating systems.

Operating system users with the same primary membership as the owner of the Oracle Beehive application tier file system may call beectl commands. The following are the exceptions to this:

New and Removed Commands

The following tables list new and removed commands in the Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.x patch releases, compared to Oracle Beehive 2.0.

Table 2-1 New beectl Commands in Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.1

Utility Function

list_template_evolution_target_workspaces

Lists the workspaces to which the latest version of the given workspace template needs to be applied to make the workspaces conform to the latest version of the template.

list_applied_workspace_templates

Lists the workspace templates that have been applied to this workspace. For each applied template it indicates whether this workspace is a template evolution target.


Table 2-2 New beectl Commands in Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.3

Utility Function

validate_midtier

It validates midtier for various conditions. For example, it reports the issues of database connectivity with each individual rac node.

add_search_recovery_scope

Recover the search index for entities of the specified types, in the specified Scope, and which were last modified between the specified dates.

list_operation_statuses

Lists the Operation Statuses.

export_workspace

Exports workspace contents into an external directory.

import_workspace

Imports contents of an external directory into a new team workspace.


Table 2-3 Removed beectl Commands in Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.3

Utility Function

modify_search

Create system model objects for Search and configure them.

modify_search_engine

Starts or stops the search crawl process for a specific source type.

list_search_recovery_status

Lists the status and reports on how many containers need to be recovered.

add_search_recovery_container

Adds/updates the recovery_id for the specified container.


Table 2-4 New beectl Commands in Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.4

Utility Function

recover_search_failures

Recover search failures. If scope is not specified, recover search failures from all scopes.


Table 2-5 New beectl Commands in Oracle Beehive 2.0.1.5

Utility Function

upload_apns_keystore

Uploads the provider file for Apple Push Notification Service.


Summary of Commands

The following tables list all the available beectl commands.

Table 2-6 Category: access control

Utility Function

add_assigned_role

Creates an AssignedRole entity.

add_local_ace

Adds an Access Control Entry (ACE) to an entity's Local Access Control List (LACL).

add_role_definition

Creates a RoleDefinition entity.

add_sensitivity

Creates a Sensitivity entity.

add_sensitivity_ace

Adds an Access Control Entry (ACE) to a Sensitivity entity's Sensitivity ACL (SACL).

delete_assigned_role

Deletes an AssignedRole entity.

delete_local_ace

Deletes an Access Control Entry (ACE) from the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

delete_role_definition

Deletes a RoleDefinition entity.

delete_sensitivity

Deletes a Sensitivity entity.

delete_sensitivity_ace

Deletes an Access Control Entry (ACE) from the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity entity.

list_access_control_fields

Lists the AccessControlFields of an entity.

list_access_types

Lists available access type names and identifiers.

list_assigned_roles

Lists AssignedRole entities.

list_local_acl

Lists the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

list_privileges

Lists available Privilege names.

list_role_definitions

Lists RoleDefinition entities.

list_sensitivities

Lists Sensitivity entities.

list_sensitivity_acl

Lists the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity.

modify_access_control_fields

Modifies the AccessControlFields of an existing entity.

modify_assigned_role

Modifies an existing AssignedRole entity.

modify_local_ace

Replaces an Access Control Entry (ACE) in the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

modify_role_definition

Modifies an existing RoleDefinition entity.

modify_sensitivity

Modifies an existing Sensitivity entity.

modify_sensitivity_ace

Replaces an Access Control Entry (ACE) in the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity entity.


Table 2-7 Category: audit

Utility Function

add_audit_policy

Creates an audit policy from the XML file information

add_audit_trail

Creates an audit trail from the search result generated using the XML file

delete_audit_policy

Deletes an existing audit

delete_audit_trail

Deletes an existing audit trail

export_audit_trail

Exports an existing audit trail by the given identifier

list_audit_policies

Lists audit policies and prints policy information

list_audit_trails

Lists audit trails and prints trail information

modify_audit_policy

Modifies an existing audit policy

modify_audit_trail

Modifies an existing audit trail


Table 2-8 Category: client application

Utility Function

add_attendant

Adds an auto attendant or copies an existing one under a new name. When copying any prompts will also be copied.

add_client_application_configuration

Creates a client application configuration object from a supplied input file. The resulting object will be used for client application provisioning.

add_client_application_provisioning

Provisions client applications to a community.

add_voice_facility

Creates a voice facility by associating phone rules with an already created group. The command may be run multiple times and each new execution will append new rules to existing rules for a given group collabid.

delete_attendant

Deletes an auto attendant by name.

delete_attendant_prompt

Deletes a prompt.

delete_client_application

Deletes a client application.

delete_client_application_configuration

Deletes the client application configuration with the given identifier.

delete_client_application_patchset

Deletes a client application patchset.

delete_client_application_provisioning

De-provisions client applications from a community.

delete_client_application_version

Deletes a client application version.

delete_voice_facility

Removes specific rules or all rules for a given group collabid. To remove specific rules, then the list the rules to remove in the parameter options. To remove all rules only specify the collabid

export_client_application_configuration

Exports a client application configuration to a local file.

list_attendant_aaml

Prints the Auto Attendant Markup Language for an auto attendant.

list_attendant_prompts

Lists all prompts that have been uploaded for an attendant.

list_attendants

Lists all attendants in the system.

list_client_application_configuration

Lists the client application configurations.

list_client_application_modules

Lists the modules for a given client application patchset.

list_client_application_patchsets

Lists the patchsets for a given client application version.

list_client_application_versions

Lists all the versions for a given client application.

list_client_applications

Lists all the client applications.

list_client_applications_usage

Lists the client applications usage report. The command displays the number of devices that have installed a client application.

list_voice_facilities

The list command shows all of the facilities, their collab ids and phone number matching rules. The command accepts three optional parameters to help refine the search, if no parameters are specified, then all facilities are presented.

modify_attendant

Update an existing attendant with a new markup file or rename it.

upload_attendant_prompt

Upload a prompt to the database.

upload_client_application

Uploads client application binaries to the repository. Either a binary file path or path to a directory containing binary files should be specified.


Table 2-9 Category: cloning

Utility Function

clone_midtier

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier.

clone_oc4j_instance

Creates a new oc4j instance by cloning the given oc4j instance.

clone_patching

Upgrades the midtier by cloning.

clone_preparation

Prepares the existing oracle home for cloning.

clone_site

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier in a new deployment (i.e., site). This command is part of the Deployment Cloning solution. Please see the administrator guide for details.

list_clone_properties

Lists the set of system model properties required for ias cloning scripts.


Table 2-10 Category: coexistence

Utility Function

add_coexistence_system

Creates a new coexisting remote system.

delete_coexistence_profile

Deletes the coexistence profile of user.

delete_coexistence_system

Deletes a coexisting remote system. WARNING: This command will purge the coexisting remote system and clean all related data.

import_coexistence_data

Import data from the coexisting remote system for a given user.

list_coexistence_connectors

Lists all coexistence connectors for a coexisting remote system.

list_coexistence_profiles

Lists the profile of coexisting users.

list_coexistence_status

Reports the status of the coexisting containers and coexistence profiles.

list_coexistence_systems

Lists all coexisting remote systems.

modify_coexistence_profile

Create or modify the coexistence profile of a user.

modify_coexistence_system

Modifies a coexisting remote system.


Table 2-11 Category: configuration

Utility Function

activate_configuration

Saves proposed configuration and activate it.

add_blocked_device

Creates a blocked device. The system object identifier of the resulting object needs to be added to the 'DeviceManagementService' system object, using modify_property command, to block this device from accessing Beehive Mobile Services.

add_coexistence_system

Creates a new coexisting remote system.

add_dmz_home_instance

Creates configuration for a Beehive installation in the DMZ that is, outside the firewall.

add_search_recovery_scope

Recovers the search index for Entities of the specified types, in the specified Scope, and which were last modified between the specified dates.

add_urm

Configures an agent for a URM instance.

add_virus_scan_engine

Adds a new virus scan engine to the collection of engines configured for the Site. If this is the first scan engine being added, this command will create a new collection for the Site and add the virus scan engine to it.

append_value

Appends the specified value to the existing value of the named property. If the named property value is cleared before executing this command, then after executing this command it will contain the new value.

clear_proposed_configuration

Clears proposed configuration of the Beehive system object model

clone_midtier

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier.

clone_oc4j_instance

Creates a new oc4j instance by cloning the given oc4j instance.

clone_patching

Upgrades the midtier by cloning.

clone_preparation

Prepares the existing oracle home for cloning.

clone_site

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier in a new deployment (i.e., site). This command is part of the Deployment Cloning solution. Please see the administrator guide for details.

delete_coexistence_system

Deletes a coexisting remote system. WARNING: This command will purge the coexisting remote system and clean all related data.

delete_dmz_home_instance

Removes configuration for a Beehive installation in the DMZ that is, outside the firewall.

delete_oc4j_instance

Deletes the specified oc4j.

delete_property

Clears the value of specified property in the configuration object identified by specified id.

delete_remote_home_instance

Deletes the specified beehive home from central configuration repository.

delete_virus_scan_engine

Deletes specified virus scan engine from the collection of engines configured for the Site. If this is the last scan engine being deleted, this command will also delete the virus scan engine collection and update the Site to remove the virus scan engine collection from it. Either the scan_engine option or the hostname and port options will need to be specified.

download_language_pack

Exports language pack resources managed by the Beehive deployment. The exact resources exported and the output destination details are controlled by command options.

export_configuration_data

Exports configuration data for given configuration version.

list_bootstrap_configuration

Displays bootstrap configuration for local midtier.

list_clone_properties

Lists the set of system model properties required for ias cloning scripts.

list_components

Lists components in the configuration repository.

list_configuration_versions

Lists all available configuration versions and activation time information

list_connection_pools

Lists available connection pools in the system.

list_deployment_templates

Lists the available deployment templates in central configuration repository

list_language_pack

Displays summarized informations for the resources in language pack. The search criteria can include a combination of string contained in the resource name, locale of the resource, type of resource (built-in or custom). Note that only resources matching ALL (as compared to ANY) specified search criteria are displayed.

list_patch_informations

Lists the patch information for given archives.

list_ports

Lists various available ports.

list_properties

Prints property value of a component given a component identifier and property name. If property name is not specified then all the properties will be listed.

list_property_metadata

Lists the metadata about all the properties of a system model object.

list_virus_scan_policy

Lists the virus scan policy configured for the Site. Valid values for the scan policy are: NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR, SCAN_ONLY, SCAN_AND_REPAIR. Default is NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR.

modify_coexistence_system

Modifies a coexisting remote system.

modify_connection_pool

Modifies the connection pool configuration.

modify_database

Modifies given database configuration.

modify_deployment_structure

This command applies the specified template(s) to the local BeehiveInstance. Execute beectl list_deployment_templates command to view the available templates.

modify_hostname

Modifies the configuration repository for hostname of the system and updates required configuration files.

modify_local_configuration_files

This command updates configuration files local to current midtier with activated changes to centralized configuration. It can restart one or more components on current midtier if needed to make the changes take effect. Some updates to local configuration files require this command to restart all midtier components.

modify_oc4j_administrator_password

Modifies oc4j administrator password in central configuration.

modify_patch_information

Add, append or removes the patch information from the given archives.

modify_port

Modifies various ports.

modify_property

Modifies the value(s) of a named property of the component identified by --component. Multiple values can be set for one property.

modify_secure_property

This command updates the sensitive property of the system model object identified by the --component.

modify_urm_urls

update urm urls

modify_virus_scan_policy

Modifies the virus scan policy configured for the Site. Valid values for the scan policy are: NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR, SCAN_ONLY, SCAN_AND_REPAIR. Default is NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR.

recover_search_failures

Recover search failures. If scope is not specified, Recover search failures from all scopes.

upload_language_pack

Loads language pack resources into the system.

validate_configuration

Validates the configuration for given component id or for the whole system model tree.

validate_midtier

It validates midtier for various conditions. For example, it reports the issues of database connectivity with each individual rac node.

validate_site_key

Validates the given site key.

validate_virus_scan_engine_connectivity

Tests the connectivity to the virus scan engine running at the specified host and port.


Table 2-12 Category: contents

Utility Function

add_filesystem_reference

Creates a reference in Beehive to a directory on the filesystem.

add_remote_repository

Adds a remote repository.

add_remote_share

Adds a remote repository share.

delete_filesystem_reference

Removes a filesystem reference from Beehive.

delete_remote_repository

Deletes a remote repository.

delete_remote_share

Deletes a remote share.

import_documents

Imports documents into Beehive from files on the server without copying the file content. Data on the server files will be treated as read-only; should an imported document be edited in Beehive, a copy of the content will be made at that time.

list_filesystem_references

Lists the filesystem path, read-only status, and identifier of all available filesystem references.

list_remote_repositories

Lists remote repositories.

list_remote_repository_definitions

Lists seeded remote repository definitions.

list_remote_shares

Lists remote shares.

modify_remote_repository

Modifies the name and/or the description of a Remote Repository.

modify_remote_share

Modifies the name and/or the description of a Remote Share.


Table 2-13 Category: devices

Utility Function

add_blocked_device

Creates a blocked device. The system object identifier of the resulting object needs to be added to the 'DeviceManagementService' system object, using modify_property command, to block this device from accessing Beehive Mobile Services.

add_device_command

Creates a device command for a given device.

delete_device

Deletes the device with the given identifier.

delete_device_profile

Deletes the device profile or device profiles. The command can delete the device profile with the given identifier or with the given device profile name or delete the device profiles specified from the given file containing names of the device profiles. The command can also optionally delete all the device types associated with this device profile.

delete_device_type

Deletes the device type with the given identifier.

download_device_logs

Downloads the logs for a device. This command can either download all log files for a device or all log files for a given application on the device or a particular log file.

download_syncml_messages

Downloads SyncML messages.

download_syncml_sessions

Downloads SyncML messages.

list_client_applications_usage

Lists the client applications usage report. The command displays the number of devices that have installed a client application.

list_device_commands

Lists the device commands for a given device. The list can be further filtered by specifying the status of the device command.

list_device_logs

Lists the device logs for a given device.

list_device_profiles

Lists all the device profiles.

list_device_types

Lists all the device types.

list_devices

Lists the devices either belonging to a user or with the specified device status.

modify_device

Modifies the device with the given identifier.

upload_apns_keystore

Uploads the provider file for Apple Push Notification Service.

upload_device_profiles

Uploads device profiles to the repository. An XML file or a directory containing XML files can be used as the source for the device profiles. The file can also contain device types and device profile schema.


Table 2-14 Category: expertise

Utility Function

add_expertise_user_scope

The add_expertise_user_scope command adds new expertise user scope. The expertise user scope information is supplied in a XML file.

delete_expertise_user_scope

The delete_expertise_user_scope command deletes expertise user scope. The expertise user scope CollabId/BODN is supplied with --expertise_user_scope option.

list_expertise_background_jobs

Displays the status of all expertise background jobs.

list_expertise_profiling_configuration

The list_expertise_profiling_configuration command lists the profiling configuration.

list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities

The list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities command lists all the entities for whom expertise profiling is enabled.

list_expertise_profiling_status

The list_expertise_profiling_status command lists the expertise profiling status of the user specified. The profiling status information comprises Enability, Bootstrap, Searchability statuses.

list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails

The list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails command lists all the email addresses that have been blacklisted for expertise relationship profiling.

list_expertise_stop_phrases

Lists the stop phrases for expertise service.

list_expertise_user_scopes

The list_expertise_user_scopes command lists all expertise user scope or detailed version of supplied expertise user scope CollabId/BODN with --expertise_user_scope option.

modify_expertise_background_job

Modifies the expertise background jobs.

modify_expertise_entity_searchability

The modify_expertise_entity_searchability command controls whether the specified entity will be searchable or not.

modify_expertise_profiling_configuration

The modify_expertise_profiling_configuration command modifies the expertise profiling configuration. The profiling configuration information is supplied in an XML file.

modify_expertise_stop_phrases

The modify_expertise_stop_phrases command modifies (add/remove) stop phrases for Expertise service. The phrases are supplied in a XML file

modify_expertise_user_scope

The modify_expertise_user_scope command modifies expertise user scope. The expertise user scope information is supplied in a XML file.


Table 2-15 Category: language packs

Utility Function

download_language_pack

Exports language pack resources managed by the Beehive deployment. The exact resources exported and the output destination details are controlled by command options.

list_language_pack

Displays summarized informations for the resources in language pack. The search criteria can include a combination of string contained in the resource name, locale of the resource, type of resource (built-in or custom). Note that only resources matching ALL (as compared to ANY) specified search criteria are displayed.

upload_language_pack

Loads language pack resources into the system.


Table 2-16 Category: messaging

Utility Function

add_email_endpoint

Add an email endpoint

delete_email_message

Moves an email message to a target folder or removes it outright

delete_xmpp_chat_rooms

This command is used to delete an xmpp chat room by name (if it exists, else it is a NOOP) specified by the --roomname option. Room-names are case insensitive. This command can also be used to delete those xmpp chat rooms which have not been accessed for a period of days specified by the --olderthan option.

export_email_data

Export all email data to a file

import_email_data

Import email data from a file created by export command into a given folder

list_email_messages

List the email messages in a transport queue

list_email_queues

List the email transport queues information

list_xmpp_chat_rooms

Used to list all currently existing XMPP chat rooms.

modify_email_port

Modifies Email service' SMTP or IMAP port number

modify_email_queue

Enables or disables Email asynchronous queue processing

modify_im_preferences

Modifies existing instant message preferences of a user.

send_broadcast_im_message

Sends Instant Message to all online users.


Table 2-17 Category: organizations

Utility Function

add_organization

Creates an organization in the given scope

delete_organization

Deletes an existing organization, and sub-organizations and workspaces under it (with --force_cascade option). And/or purges deleted organization manually (with --purge option). Use list_deleted_organizations to get the CENs of deleted organizations.

list_deleted_organizations

Lists deleted organizations

list_enterprises

Lists all enterprises and prints names and identifiers

list_organizations

Lists organizations in the given scope

modify_enterprise

Modifies an existing enterprise

modify_organization

Modifies an existing organization


Table 2-18 Category: policies

Utility Function

add_event_subscription

Creates an event subscription using data in an XML file.

add_policy

Creates a policy using data in an XML file.

add_policy_schema

Creates a policy schema using data in an XML file.

add_policy_template

Creates a policy template using data in an XML file.

delete_event_subscription

Deletes an event subscription from the Oracle Beehive repository.

delete_failed_action_events

Purge actions that have not completed successfully.

delete_policy

Deletes a policy.

delete_policy_action

Deletes a policy action.

delete_policy_schema

Deletes a policy schema.

delete_policy_template

Deletes a policy template.

export_policy

Exports policy data into an XML file.

list_event_groups

Lists all business object events.

list_events

Lists all business object events.

list_failed_action_events

List actions that have not completed successfully.

list_policies

Lists policies in an specific container. Details returned include policy names and identifiers.

list_policy_actions

Lists all policy actions.

list_policy_schemas

Lists policy schemas in the current enterprise. Details returned include policy schema names and identifiers.

list_policy_templates

Lists policy templates in a specified container. Details returned include policy template names and identifiers.

modify_failed_action_events

Retry actions that have not completed successfully.

modify_policy

Modifies an existing policy using data in an XML file.

modify_policy_schema

Modifies an existing policy schema using data in an XML file.

modify_policy_template

Modifies an existing policy template using data in an XML file.

validate_policy

Evaluates or executes a policy based on an event payload file.


Table 2-19 Category: process control

Utility Function

restart

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.

start

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.

status

Displays the status of all managed components.

stop

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.


Table 2-20 Category: real time

Utility Function

add_conference

Creates conference artifact under workspace

add_conference_template

Creates conference-template artifact under workspace

delete_conference

Deletes conference artifact under workspace

delete_conference_template

Deletes conference template artifact under workspace

list_conference_templates

Lists conference-template artifacts under workspace

list_conferences

Lists conference artifacts under workspace

list_my_conferences

Lists conference artifacts under workspace


Table 2-21 Category: records

Utility Function

add_record

Adds a record or non-record.

delete_record

Deletes a record or non-record.

list_file_plan

Lists the file plan.


Table 2-22 Category: resources

Utility Function

add_resource

Creates a new resource.

delete_resources

Deletes a resource.

list_resources

Lists resources.

modify_resource_classifications

This command set the given category as resource root classification.

modify_resources

Modifies an existing resource.


Table 2-23 Category: security

Utility Function

add_trusted_identity

This command registers a trusted identity. There are two types of trusted identities: WSSEC and SES. Default type is WSSEC. For WSSEC type, please make sure that the service has a valid certificate registered in the wallet and the correct associated key alias is passed into this command. This command also creates the principal(s) associated with this trusted identity in the Beehive system. On the other hand, for SES type, this command stores the given trusted identity name and password information.

delete_trusted_identity

This command unregisters a trusted identity. If the type of identity is not specified, it is defaulted to WSSEC.

list_trusted_identity

This command lists the trusted identities. The type has to be specified. For type SES, it lists the names of the trusted entities.

modify_trusted_identity

This command modifies the details of the trusted identity. At least one of the options new_service_name or new_key_alias need to be specified for this modification if the type is WSSEC. If the type of identity is not specified, it is defaulted to WSSEC.


Table 2-24 Category: subscription

Utility Function

add_user_subscription

Creates a user subscription from a pre-defined rule in a subscription template.

list_user_subscriptions

List user subscriptions

modify_user_subscription

Enables or disables an existing subscription


Table 2-25 Category: templates

Utility Function

modify_notification_template

Modifies a specified notification template for the Notification service.


Table 2-26 Category: timemanagement

Utility Function

add_ischedule_server

Add a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

clear_calendar_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified calendar.

clear_tasklist_permissions

Reset the access permissions of a tasklist to their out-of-box defaults.

delete_ischedule_server

Delete a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

export_icalendar

Export invitations and assignments from a calendar and/or tasklist to an iCalendar file.

import_icalendar

Import an iCalendar file to an existing calendar and/or tasklist. If an iCalendarObject has a UID that already exists in the destination calendar and/or tasklist it will be re-created. VCALENDAR components can have many VEVENT and VTODO sub-components with different UIDs but sub-components of the same UID must be consecutive. A VCALENDAR component imported with a METHOD:X-ORACLE-DELETE or METHOD:CANCEL will cause all sub-components to be deleted.

list_calendar_enrollments

List the directly enrolled and directly unenrolled members of the specified team workspace calendar.

list_calendar_permissions

List the access control permissions of a user, resource or workspace's calendar. When multiple calendars match the selection criteria for the user, resource or workspace, the default calendar will be used.

list_calendars

Lists the existing calendars of a user, resource or workspace.

list_ischedule_servers

List remote iSchedule Server configurations.

list_tasklist_permissions

List the access control permissions of a user, resource or workspace's tasklist. When multiple tasklists match the selection criteria for the user, resource or workspace, the default tasklist will be used.

list_tasklists

Lists existing tasklists of a user, resource or workspace.

modify_calendar

Modify various attributes of the selected calendar.

modify_calendar_enrollments

Modify the enrollment list of the specified team workspace calendar.

modify_calendar_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified calendar.

modify_ischedule_server

Modify a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

modify_tasklist

Modify various attributes of the selected tasklist.

modify_tasklist_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified tasklist.


Table 2-27 Category: timezones

Utility Function

import_timezones

Imports time zone definitions to the database.

list_timezones

Lists time zones in the database.

modify_timezones

Modify a time zone.


Table 2-28 Category: users

Utility Function

add_custom_user_property

The add_custom_user_property command adds custom user properties.

add_directory_profile

The add_directory_profile command adds a new directory profile.

add_external_contact

The add_external_contact command adds new external contact.

add_feed_configuration

The add_feed_configuration command adds new feed configurations.

add_group

The add_group command adds new groups. The group information is supplied in an XML file.

add_preference_profile

The add_preference_profile command adds a new preference profile and associates it with a consumer. There can be only one preference profile for a consumer.

add_preference_property

The add_preference_property command adds a new preference property to a preference set.

add_preference_set

The add_preference_set command adds a preference set to a preference profile.

add_user

The add_user command adds new users. The user information is supplied either on command line or in an XML file.

delete_coexistence_profile

Deletes the coexistence profile of user.

delete_custom_user_property

The delete_custom_user_property command deletes a custom property. If there are multiple custom properties with same name, then only the first occurrence of the attribute with specified name is deleted. Any values of the property being deleted will also be deleted.

delete_directory_profile

The delete_directory_profile command deletes a directory profile.

delete_feed_configuration

The delete_feed_configuration command deletes feed configuration.

delete_group

The delete_group command deletes a group with an option to purge.

delete_preference_profile

The delete_preference_profile command deletes a preference profile.

delete_preference_property

The delete_preference_property command deletes a preference property from a preference set.

delete_preference_set

The delete_preference_set command deletes a preference set.

delete_user

The delete_user command deletes a user with an option to purge.

download_ldap_group_data

The download_ldap_group_data command downloads groups information for an external directory into an XML file. The generated XML file can be used with add_group command to create the groups.

download_ldap_user_data

The download_ldap_user_data command downloads user information for an external directory into an XML file. The generated XML file can be used with add_users command to create the users.

list_coexistence_profiles

Lists the profile of coexisting users.

list_custom_user_properties

The list_custom_user_properties command lists all custom properties of users.

list_directory_profiles

The list_directory_profiles command lists directory profiles in an XML file.

list_external_contacts

The list_external_contacts command lists contacts that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all contacts are listed. It also lists the details of the contact(s) whose identifier is specified.

list_feed_configurations

The list_feed_configurations command lists the feed configurations in the given scope.

list_groups

The list_groups command lists groups that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all groups are listed.

list_ldap_change_number

Lists the last change-log number processed by beehive for specified profile.

list_max_address_count

The list_max_address_count command lists the maximum number of addresses of an address type that can be set for a given person-contact, group-contact or resource-contact in an address-book. The address types determine the type of address like BUSINESS, PERSONAL and OTHER. This command also lists the system defined maximum limit, which cannot be exceeded.

list_preference_profiles

The list_preference_profiles command lists preference profiles for a consumer.

list_preference_properties

The list_preference_properties command lists all effective preference properties of a preference set.

list_preference_sets

The list_preference_sets command lists all preference sets for a preference profile.

list_users

The list_users command lists users that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all users are listed.

modify_coexistence_profile

Create or modify the coexistence profile of a user.

modify_directory_entry

Modifies the directory entry and locator for a given directory entry. This command can be used to convert a directory user to an external directory user and vice versa.

modify_directory_profile

The modify_directory_profile command modifies an existing directory profile. Modification to the profile name cannot be done.

modify_external_contact

The modify_external_contact command modifies existing external contact.

modify_feed_configuration

The modify_feed_configuration command modifies existing feed configurations.

modify_group

The modify_group command modifies a group. The group information is supplied in an XML file.

modify_ldap_change_number

Modifies the changelog number of a profile.

modify_max_address_count

The modify_max_address_count command modifies maximum number of addresses of an address type that can be set for a given person-contact, group-contact or resource-contact in an address-book. The address types determine the type of address like BUSINESS, PERSONAL & OTHER. The maximum count specified in this command must be less than the system defined maximum limit, which can be determined by running list_max_address_count command.

modify_preference_set

The modify_preference_set command modifies the preference set by setting the extends from attribute.

modify_user

The modify_user command modifies exisiting users.

validate_directory_entry

e> <s the directory entry in ldap with corresponding entry in beehive. The directory entry can be of type user, group or external person. The command provides an option to correct any data inconsistencies by applying necessary changes in beehive. The state of the profile specified in this command can either be ENABLE or DISABLE.


Table 2-29 Category: utilities

Utility Function

delete_virus_scan_results

Deletes virus scan results from the system that match the specified criteria. Option scandate cannot be specified with options scandate_from or scandate_to.

export_errorcodes

Search for occurrences of error codes

export_filesystem_logs

Search log files stored on host machines.

export_logs

With an option of refreshing the repository first, query the repository to get relevant log records from log files stored on host machines.

export_probes

Lists all probe information in beehive.

list_command_metadata

Lists all the metadata about given command.

list_commands

Lists the command names based on the given criteria.

list_errorcode_catalog

List all error code definitions in beehive.

list_operation_statuses

List the Operation Statuses

list_schema_clones

Search the ocs_clone_registry table based on the specified options and display the matched clone records.

list_schemas

Search the ocs_schema_registry table based on the specified options and display the matched schema records.

list_statistics

Lists the statistics for a given type or component or for the entire site.

list_supported_entity_types

Prints the supported entity types which can be used in business object distinguished naming pattern instead of system generated identifier and their description.

list_virus_scan_results

Lists the virus scan results that match the specified criteria. Only a count of the matches found will be displayed if the option to list only the counts is specified. Option count_only cannot be specified with options maximum_results or display_columns. Option scandate cannot be specified with options scandate_from or scandate_to.

obfuscate

Obfuscates the prompted string.

version

This command shows the version information of the Beehive products.


Table 2-30 Category: workspace

Utility Function

add_category

Creates a category at the enterprise scope

add_category_application

Applies a category on a given entity

add_category_configuration

Creates a category configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

add_team_workspace

Creates a team workspace from a template

add_team_workspace_template_application

Transforms the given team workspace to conform to the given team workspace template

add_team_workspace_template_evolution

Applies the latest snapshot of the given team workspace template to all the team workspaces to which the template was applied earlier

add_version_configuration

Creates a version configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

delete_category

Deletes a category and all category applications.

delete_category_application

Removes a category from an entity

delete_category_configuration

Deletes a given category configuration.

delete_version_configuration

Deletes a given version configuration.

download_generated_team_workspace_template

Generates a team workspace template from the given team workspace

download_workspace_template_schema

Downloads workspace template XML schema to a file

export_workspace

Exports workspace contents into an external directory.

import_workspace

Imports contents of an external directory into a new team workspace.

list_applied_workspace_templates

Lists the workspace templates that have been applied to this workspace. For each applied template it indicates whether this workspace is a template evolution target.

list_categories

Lists the categories in the enterprise.If the recurse option is used then sub-categories are also listed.

list_category

Prints information about a category given a category identifier

list_category_applications

List all the categories (and associated attributes) applied to a specific entity. Lists the application of a specific category to the entity if the [category] parameter is provided.

list_category_configuration

Lists the category configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

list_deleted_workspaces

Lists deleted workspaces

list_template_evolution_target_workspaces

Lists the workspaces to which the latest version of the given workspace template needs to be applied to make the workspaces conform to the latest version of the template

list_version_configuration

Lists the version configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

list_workspace_templates

Lists all workspace templates

list_workspaces

Lists workspaces in an organization or enterprise

modify_category

Modifies an existing category

modify_category_configuration

Updates a given category configuration.

modify_personal_workspace

Modifies an existing personal workspace

modify_team_workspace

Modifies an existing team workspace

modify_version_configuration

Updates a given version configuration.

modify_workspace_template

Modifies an existing workspace template


Common Options

The beectl command options can be broken down into two types: common options, and command specific options. This section describes common options that can be used with any beectl command.

The following is a complete list of common options for all beectl commands:

--format

Specify the output format type. Valid options are multiline, xml, table, and tiled. The default format is multiline.

--separator

Specify the separator to use when formatting an output type of tiled with the --format option. Any character may be used as a separator. The default separator is "|".

--entity_format

Specify display format of the entity. Valid entity format options are name, id, and name_and_id. Default format is name.

--timezone_id

Specify the time zone to use if any date and time information is returned by the command. To determine a time zone ID, use the list_timezones command.

--no_confirmation

Allow the command to be executed without prompting for any confirmation. This option applies only to remove and delete commands.

--version

Print the version information of a beectl command. This option does not require an argument.

--help

Print a usage message.

--log_level

Specify the logging level. Valid arguments for this option are: FINEST, FINER, FINE, CONFIG, INFO, WARNING, SEVERE, ERROR, INTERNAL_ERROR, NOTIFICATION, and TRACE. If no log level is specified, the default, INFO, will be used. This option cannot be used while in shell mode or batch mode. Specify the option when invoking either mode.

--logdir

Specify the full path to the log directory. The default value is ORACLE_HOME/beehive/logs/beectl/. This option cannot be used while in shell mode or batch mode. Specify the option when invoking either mode.

--batchfile

Specify the full path and file name of a batch file. Commands and options can be specified in a file and passed with this option for batch processing.

--continue

Force Oracle Beehive to continue with the next command when using the --batchfile option. The next command will be executed regardless of the exit code of the previous command.

--activate_configuration

Commands that deal with updating the system object model make use of this option to determine if they need to save their modification to the configuration system.

--no_wrap

If specified, the cell values in the tabular format output of a command will not be wrapped.

--no_stagger

If specified, the columns of the tabular format output of a command will not be staggered.

--column_format

Specify customized column format string. For example, 10%10%20%. This option is applicable only to commands that have tabular output. If not specified or an incorrect value is specified, it will be ignored, and the maximum content length for each column will be used to set column width.

--terminal_width

Modify the default terminal width. By default, the terminal width is 80 characters.

--obfuscated

Specify this option when all passwords passed with the command are obfuscated.

--authuser

Specify the user name for beectl commands requiring authentication.

--authpassword

Specify the user password for the user specified with the --authuser option. The argument for this option must be obfuscated using the --obfuscated if passed on the command line.

Note:

Option arguments should not start with a hyphen (-). If an option argument needs to start with hyphen, use one of the following options:
  • Use the <option name> = <option value> format; this is the preferred way to specify option values starting with hyphens.

  • Prefix the option value with string ESCAPE:.

  • Prefix the option value with an escaped backslash (\\). This is the least preferred way. This may not work in some operating systems; it does not work in Microsoft Windows.

Option values should not contain the any special characters (such as *, $, and %). If an option value contains a special character, then enclose the option value in double quotes (").

System Object Identifiers

System model objects in the system model can be uniquely identified with the following mechanisms:

System Object Identifier

A unique identifier assigned to each system model object at the time of creation. The system object identifier is read-only and it cannot be changed. For example, 8ae5c0e8-02c8-429e-9773-186e6a79997b.

Built-In Alias

A unique, built-in alias is assigned to certain system model objects at the time of creation. Built-in alias names are read-only and it cannot be changed. For example, _CURRENT_SITE refers to the current site system model object and _CURRENT_ENTERPRISE refers to the current enterprise system model object.

User Defined Alias

You can assign a unique user defined name to each system model object. Oracle Beehive ensures that all user defined aliases are unique. The user defined alias are mutable and can be modified at any point of time. For example, oracle_smtp_service can refer to an SMTP service system model object.

Encoded System Object Identifier

To refer to a system model objects that lies deep in the system model hierarchy, use the following syntax:

<unique ID>[:<property name>][:<property name>][:<property name>]

<unique ID> is a system object identifier, built-in alias, or user defined alias of a system model object, and <property name> is a valid property name of the preceding model object. The type of property should be a system model object.

For example, the following command list the properties of the logging properties of the database of the current site:

beectl list_properties --component _CURRENT_SITE:Database:LoggingProperties

Providing Secure Values

The following are the available methods to provide secure values, such as passwords, to a command:

Prompt

Only provide the option (without providing the secure value). The beectl tool will prompt you for the secure value. Some commands may ask you to reconfirm the secure value.

Obfuscate

Obfuscate the secure value with the obfuscate command. Use the obfuscated value for the option that requires the secured value along with the common option --obfuscated.

Clear Text

To provide secure values in clear text, run commands in beectl shell mode.

Tabular Output

The following options allow you to control the display of tabular output:

--no_wrap

Specify that content wrapping will not be applied to cell values.

--no_stagger

Specify that columns will not be staggered. By default, columns will not be staggered if there are three or less columns.

--column_format

Specify the column widths (in chars) for each column. This value will be ignored if number of columns given in this option do not match the number of columns in the resultant table. The following is an example of this option:

beectl list_property_metadata         
   --type ManagementService         
   --full_report         
   --column_format 10%10%10%10%10%         

-----------+------------+------------+------------+-----------------------------
Property n | Property T | Metadata   | Short desc | Long descr
ame        | ype        |            | ription    | iption
-----------+------------+------------+------------+-----------------------------
AutoSyncSa | int        | Not ReadOn | [Short des | [Long desc
veListener |            | ly-Mutable | cription k | ription ke
SleepInter |            | -Mandatory | ey not set | y not set.
valInSecon |            |            | .]         | ]
ds         |            |            |            |
-----------+------------+------------+------------+-----------------------------
...

You may not specify this option with --no_stagger or --no_wrap.

--terminal_width

Specify the terminal width of the terminal in which you are running the beectl tool. Specify this option if you have resized your terminal to more than 80 character widths and you want the command output to fit the entire width of your terminal. The Default (minimum) value for terminal width is 80.

Boolean Values

If an option requires a boolean value (either true or false), and you specify the option without specifying a value, the command assumes a value of true for the option.

activate_configuration

Saves proposed configuration and activate it.

SYNTAX

beectl activate_configuration 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl activate_configuration

add_assigned_role

Creates an AssignedRole entity.

SYNTAX

beectl add_assigned_role [--scope <unique identifier of the Scope>] --name <name of AssignedRole> [--description <description>] --assigned_scope <assigned_unique identifier of the Scope> --role_definition <unique identifier of the RoleDefinition> [[--accessor <unique identifier of an Accessor>]...]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Specify the unique identifier of the Scope in which the AssignedRole should be created.

--name

Specify the name of the AssignedRole.

--description

Specify a description for the AssignedRole.

--assigned_scope

Specify the unique identifier of an assigned Scope for the AssignedRole.

--role_definition

Specify the unique identifier of an assigned RoleDefinition for the AssignedRole.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of an Accessor to add to the AssignedRole. This option can be specified more than once.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_assigned_role --scope wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyAssignedRole --assigned_scope wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --role_definition acrd=MyRoleDefinition,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

add_attendant

Adds an auto attendant or copies an existing one under a new name. When copying any prompts will also be copied.

SYNTAX

beectl add_attendant { --file <AAML file> | --name <new name> --copy_from <existing attendant> }
 

OPTIONS

--file

An auto-attendant markup language file describing the attendant to be added. When specified, name and copy_from must be specified.

--name

Name to be given to copied attendant. When specified, copy_from must also be specified and file must not be specified

--copy_from

Name of attedant to copy. When specified, copy_from must also be specified and file must not be specified

EXAMPLES

beectl add_attendant --file example.aaml

beectl add_attendant --name copiedAttendant --copy_from someAttendant

add_audit_policy

Creates an audit policy from the XML file information

SYNTAX

beectl add_audit_policy --file <Full path of the input file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Full path name of the input XML file

EXAMPLES

beectl add_audit_policy --file /tmp/policy_ex.xml

add_audit_trail

Creates an audit trail from the search result generated using the XML file

SYNTAX

beectl add_audit_trail --file <Full path of the input file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Full path name of the input XML file

EXAMPLES

beectl add_audit_trail --file /tmp/trail_ex.xml

add_blocked_device

Creates a blocked device. The system object identifier of the resulting object needs to be added to the 'DeviceManagementService' system object, using modify_property command, to block this device from accessing Beehive Mobile Services.

SYNTAX

beectl add_blocked_device --device <deviceid> [--description <description>]
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the local device identifier.

--description

Describe why the device is being blocked.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_blocked_device --device 981214

add_category

Creates a category at the enterprise scope

SYNTAX

beectl add_category --file <Full path of the category XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Full path name of the XML file. The file must contain the properly formatted data to create the category

EXAMPLES

beectl add_category --file /tmp/category.xml

add_category_application

Applies a category on a given entity

SYNTAX

beectl add_category_application --category <Identifier of the category to be applied>  -- entity <Identifier of the entity to which the category needs to be applied>  
 

OPTIONS

--category

Specify the identifier of the category.

--entity

Specify the identifier of an Oracle Beehive entity to which the category needs to be applied.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_category_application --category catg=MyCategory,enpr=MyEnterprise --entity adoc=MyDocument,fldr=MyFolder,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

add_category_configuration

Creates a category configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

SYNTAX

beectl add_category_configuration --container <Configuration scope or heterogenous folder> --file <Full path of the configuration XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--container

Scope or heterogenous folder on which the category configuration should be defined.

--file

Full path of the category configuration XML file. The file must contain properly formatted data.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_category_configuration --container orgn=MyOrganization,enpr=MyEnterprise --file /tmp/configuration.xml

add_client_application_configuration

Creates a client application configuration object from a supplied input file. The resulting object will be used for client application provisioning.

SYNTAX

beectl add_client_application_configuration --file <path to the XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and name of the XML input file. The file should contain information about how to create a client application configuration.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_client_application_configuration --file /tmp/app-config.xml

add_client_application_provisioning

Provisions client applications to a community.

SYNTAX

beectl add_client_application_provisioning --community <community identifier> {--configuration <client application configuration identifier>... | --all | --application <Identifier of the client application> | --application_version <Identifier of the client application version>}
 

OPTIONS

--community

Specify the identifier of the community.

--configuration

Specify the identifier of the client application configuration. This option can be specified more than once.

--all

Specify this option to provision the latest binaries (latest version and latest patchset) of all client applications to this community.

--application

Specify this option to provision the specified application to this community. This would make the latest binaries (latest version and latest patchset) to be available to the members of the provisioned community.

--application_version

Specify this option to provision the specified version to this community. This would make the latest patchset in the specified version to be available to the members of the provisioned community.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

beectl add_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --all

beectl add_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --application 21EC:0AE5:capn:406E6CD925A8F087E040578C921636E5000000000979

beectl add_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --application_version 21EC:0AE5:capv:406E6CD925A8F087E040578C921636E5000000000979

add_coexistence_system

Creates a new coexisting remote system.

SYNTAX

beectl add_coexistence_system --name <name> --product_name <product_name> {--url <url>|--host_name <host_name> --port <port_number> {--use_http|--use_https}} --partnership_key [--timezone_alias_namespace <timezone_alias_namespace>]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Specify the name of the coexisting remote system.

--product_name

Specify the product name of the coexisting remote system. Supported product are EXCHANGE and DOMINO.

--url

Specify the URL of the coexisting remote system.

--use_http

Specify that "HTTP" MUST be used for the coexisting remote system.

--use_https

Specify that "HTTPS" MUST be used for the coexisting remote system.

--host_name

Specify the host name of the coexisting remote system.

--port

Specify the port number used by the coexisting remote system.

--partnership_key

Specify the partnership key of the coexisting remote system.

--timezone_alias_namespace

Specify the timezone alias namespace used by the coexisting remote system.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_coexistence_system --name ex-101 --product_name exchange --url https://example.com:7777 --partnership_key

beectl add_coexistence_system --name do-202 --product_name domino --use_https --host_name example.com --port 7777 --partnership_key

add_conference

Creates conference artifact under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl add_conference --parent <Workspace identifier> --name <Conference name> --template <Conference identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--parent

Workspace identifier

--name

Conference name

--template

Conference identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl add_conference --parent wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyConference --template owct=MyTemplate,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

add_conference_template

Creates conference-template artifact under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl add_conference_template --parent <Workspace identifier> --name <Conference name> --model <Conference or conference template identifier> --settings-xml-file <Conference settings XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--parent

Workspace identifier

--name

Conference name

--model

Conference identifier

--settings-xml-file

Conference settings XML file

EXAMPLES

beectl add_conference_template --parent wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name Template_from_template --model owct=MyTemplate,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

beectl add_conference_template --parent wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name Template_from_xmlfile --settings-xml-file /tmp/default_settings.xml sample settings file: <settings> <roles> <role> <name>Guests</name> <accessors> <accessor_id>2FD3:6B7D:user:42B3D7467840404AA8ABF34BAE421CC5000000000000</accessor_id> </accessors> <properties> <property> <name>chat.can_enable</name> <value> <permission>GRANTED</permission> </value> </property> </properties> </role> </roles> </settings>

add_custom_user_property

The add_custom_user_property command adds custom user properties.

SYNTAX

beectl add_custom_user_property --name <property_name> --type <property_type> [ --description <description> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the custom property

--type

Type of the property. Supported types are BOOLEAN, COLLABID, DATETIME, DOUBLE, STRING.

--description

Description of the custom property.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_custom_user_property --name employeenumber --type DOUBLE

add_device_command

Creates a device command for a given device.

SYNTAX

beectl add_device_command --device <identifier of the device> --action <device command action>
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

--action

Specify the action of the device command. The following are the valid command actions: UPLOADLOG UPLOADCONFIG CHECKUPDATE WIPEOUT .

EXAMPLES

beectl add_device_command --device 1234:5678:devi:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --action CHECKUPDATE

add_directory_profile

The add_directory_profile command adds a new directory profile.

SYNTAX

beectl add_directory_profile --file <filename> [ --no_validate ]
 

OPTIONS

--file

XML file containing directory profile.

--no_validate

Skips the validation of profile against the directory server.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_directory_profile --file MyDirectoryProfile.xml

beectl add_directory_profile --file MyDirectoryProfile.xml --no_validate

add_dmz_home_instance

Creates configuration for a Beehive installation in the DMZ that is, outside the firewall.

SYNTAX

beectl add_dmz_home_instance --hostname <hostname> --bti_unique_id <unique id for BTI on this oracle home> --no_of_client_workers <number of client workers> [--oracle_home <oracle home path>] [--opmn_request_port <OPMN request port>] [--opmn_remote_port <OPMN remote port>] [--bti_server_port <BTI server port>] [--instance_name <instance name>]
 

OPTIONS

--hostname

Host name of the machine.

--oracle_home

oracle home path.

--bti_unique_id

The site-wide unique identifier of BTI installed on the DMZ host. Please specify the value which is present in the oracle_home/beehive/conf/bti.properties file on the DMZ host.

--no_of_client_workers

This is the number of MX processes in the DMZ midtier. The value of this parameter should be the value of "NumberOfClientWorkers" in $OH/beehive/conf/bti.properties in DMZ midtier.

--opmn_request_port

OPMN request port

--opmn_remote_port

OPMN remote port

--bti_server_port

The server port.

--instance_name

instance name of DMZ midtier

EXAMPLES

beectl add_dmz_home_instance --hostname dmzhost.example.com --bti_unique_id 813130873 --no_of_client_workers 4

add_email_endpoint

Add an email endpoint

SYNTAX

beectl add_email_endpoint --ep_name <endpoint name> --ep_protocol <IMAP|SMTP> --type <MX|MXS|TCP|BUS> --ep_address <port number|bus address>
 

OPTIONS

--ep_name

The email endpoint name

--ep_protocol

The email protocol (SMTP|IMAP)

--type

The email endpoint type (MX|MXS|TCP|BUS)

--ep_address

The endpoint address (port number|bus address)

EXAMPLES

beectl add_email_endpoint --ep_name IMAP SSL Endpoint --ep_protocol IMAP --type MXS --ep_address 5993

add_event_subscription

Creates an event subscription using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_event_subscription --file <full path to the event subscription xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains data to create the event subscription.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_event_subscription --file /private/xml/MyEventSubscription.xml

add_expertise_user_scope

The add_expertise_user_scope command adds new expertise user scope. The expertise user scope information is supplied in a XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_expertise_user_scope --file <filename>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Filename of the XML file containing name, description, include_list and exclude_list.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_expertise_user_scope --file MyUserScope.xml

add_external_contact

The add_external_contact command adds new external contact.

SYNTAX

beectl add_external_contact     --family_name <[locale:]family name>     [ --family_name <[locale:]family name> ... ]     [ --scope <identifier of contacts parent> ]     [ --given_name <[locale:]given name> ... ]    [ --display_name <[locale:]display name> ... ]    [ --middle_name <[locale:]middle name> ... ]     [ --job_title <[locale:]job title> ... ]    [ --prefix <[locale:]prefix> ... ]    [ --suffix <[locale:]suffix> ... ]    [ --nick_name <[locale:]nick name> ... ]     [ --office_location <office location of the contact> ]     [ --company <company of the contact> ]     [ --profession <profession of the contact> ]     [ --timezone <timezone of the contact> ]     [ --locale <locale of the contact> ]     [ --department <department of the contact> ]     [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]     [ --property <name(assistant|certificate|notes)=value=description> ... ]     [ --address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_type <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_scheme <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --primary_address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--family_name

Family name of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--scope

Identifier of the enterprise under which this contact will be created.

--given_name

Given name of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--display_name

Display name of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--middle_name

Middle name of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--job_title

Job title of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--prefix

Prefix of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--suffix

Suffix of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--nick_name

Nick name of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--office_location

Office location of the contact.

--company

Company of the contact.

--profession

Profession of the contact.

--timezone

Timezone of the contact. list_timezones lists the valid timezones

--locale

Locale details of the contact. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--department

Department of the contact.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the contact belongs to.

--property

Details of the property in the format name=value=description. Supported names are certificate, assistant and notes. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value or description.

--address

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_type

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified type. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_scheme

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified scheme. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--primary_address

Primary address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_external_contact --family_name Contact1FamilyName --scope enpr=example

beectl add_external_contact --family_name Contact1FamilyName --given_name Contact1GivenName --display_name "Contact1 GivenName" --organization orgn=contact1orgn,enpr=contact1enpr

beectl add_external_contact --family_name Contact1FamilyName --scope enpr=example --address BUSINESS_1:mailto:contact1@example.com --address BUSINESS_2:fax:121345222

beectl add_external_contact --family_name Contact1FamilyName --scope enpr=example --property prop1:prop1Value

add_feed_configuration

The add_feed_configuration command adds new feed configurations.

SYNTAX

beectl add_feed_configuration    {        --name <name >        --scope <scope identifier>        --feedtype <feed type >        --title <title >         --description <description >         [--image <image >]         [--language <language >]         [--copyright <copyright>]         [--webmaster <webmaster>]     }
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the feed configuration.

--scope

Scope in which the feed configuration will be created

--feedtype

Feed type of the feed configuration. Permitted values are ANNOUNCEMENT, FORUM, FOLDER, LABEL, RECENT, TOPIC and VERSION.

--title

Title associated the feed configuration

--description

Description associated the feed configuration

--image

Image associated with this feed configuration

--language

Language associated with the feed configuration

--copyright

Copyright associated with the feed configuration

--webmaster

Webmaster associated with the feed configuration

EXAMPLES

beectl add_feed_configuration --name FeedConfigName --scope enpr=example --feedtype RECENT --title MyFeedConfiguration --description This is my feed configuration.

beectl add_feed_configuration --name MyWorkspaces --scope enpr=example --feedtype RECENT --title WorkspaceFeedConfiguration --description This is a recent workpsace feed. --image WorkspaceLogo.gif --language en

add_filesystem_reference

Creates a reference in Beehive to a directory on the filesystem.

SYNTAX

beectl add_filesystem_reference --name <Filesystem reference name> --filesystem_path <Server path> --read_only <true or false>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name to give to this filesystem reference.

--filesystem_path

Fully-qualified path on the filesystem to which this reference should point.

--read_only

Whether the referenced filesystem directory should be treated as read-only by Beehive.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_filesystem_reference --name MyFilesystemReference --filesystem_path /usr/local/bin --read_only true

add_group

The add_group command adds new groups. The group information is supplied in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_group --file <filename> [ --ldapbootstrap ]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Filename of the XML file containing group definition.

--ldapbootstrap

LDAP bootstrap flag. If this flag is specified, then uds groups will be created with directory locator and directory id. This is relevant only when --file option is used.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_group --file MyGroup.xml

beectl add_group --file MyGroup.xml --ldapbootstrap

add_ischedule_server

Add a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl add_ischedule_server --name <name> --domain_regexp <regexp> --outgoing_url <remote_url> [--outgoing_auth_id <auth_id>] [--outgoing_auth_key <auth_key>] [--incoming_auth_id <auth_id>] [--incoming_auth_key <auth_key>] [--incoming_allow_ip_regexp <regexp>] [--incoming_allow_host_regexp <regexp>] 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the remote server configuration, can contain only alpha numerical characters, underscores and dashes.

--domain_regexp

Regular expression that must match the remote user's email address.

--outgoing_url

Address of the remote iSchedule server.

--outgoing_auth_id

Authentication ID that must be used when connecting to the remote server.

--outgoing_auth_key

Key that must be used when connecting to the remote server.

--incoming_auth_id

Authentication ID that the remote server must use when connecting to the Oracle Beehive server.

--incoming_auth_key

Key that the remote server must use when connecting to the Oracle Beehive server.

--incoming_allow_ip_regexp

IP Addresses connecting to the Oracle Beehive server must match this regular expression

--incoming_allow_host_regexp

Host names connecting to the Oracle Beehive server must match this regular expression

EXAMPLES

beectl add_ischedule_server --name remoteserver --domain_regexp ".*@example.com" --outgoing_url http://remoteserver@example.com/ischedule

add_local_ace

Adds an Access Control Entry (ACE) to an entity's Local Access Control List (LACL).

SYNTAX

beectl add_local_ace --entity <unique identifier of the entity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor> [--access_types <access types string>]
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity to which the ACE will be added.

--accessor

Specify the Accessor to whom the access types will apply.

--access_types

Specify the access types string for the Accessor.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_local_ace --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser --access_types +RW-D

add_organization

Creates an organization in the given scope

SYNTAX

beectl add_organization --name <Organization name> --scope <Identifier of enterprise or organization>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the organization

--scope

Identifier of the parent scope (enterprise or organization)

EXAMPLES

beectl add_organization --name Sample_organization --scope enpr=test_org

add_policy

Creates a policy using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_policy --file <full path to the policy xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy data.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_policy --file /private/xml/MyPolicy.xml

add_policy_schema

Creates a policy schema using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_policy_schema --file <full path to the policy schema xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy schema data.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_policy_schema --file /private/xml/MyPolicySchema.xml

add_policy_template

Creates a policy template using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_policy_template --file <full path to the policy template xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy template data.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_policy_template --file /private/xml/MyPolicyTemplate.xml

add_preference_profile

The add_preference_profile command adds a new preference profile and associates it with a consumer. There can be only one preference profile for a consumer.

SYNTAX

beectl add_preference_profile --consumer <identifier> --name <profile-name> [ --description <description> ]
 

OPTIONS

--consumer

Identifier of the consumer

--name

Name of the preference profile to be created.

--description

Description of preference profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_preference_profile --consumer user=user1 --name MyProfile

add_preference_property

The add_preference_property command adds a new preference property to a preference set.

Supported types are :

IDENTIFIABLE

IDENTIFIABLE_LIST

STRING

STRING_LIST

INTEGER

INTEGER_LIST

BOOLEAN

BOOLEAN_LIST

DATE

DATE_LIST

URI

URI_LIST

FLOAT

FLOAT_LIST

SYNTAX

beectl add_preference_property --set <identifier> --name <property-name> --type <string | date | ... | identifiable> [ --value <property-value> ] [ --file <file-name> ] [ --final ]
 

OPTIONS

--set

Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.

--name

Name of the preference property.

--type

Type of preference property.

--value

Value of preference property.

--file

File name for business hours type preference property.

--final

Whether the preference property be overriden in extended property.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_preference_property --set prfs=set1,user=user1 --name MyProperty --type integer --value 100 --final

beectl add_preference_property --set prfs=set1,user=user1 --name MyProperty --type integer_list --value 100 --value 200 --value 300 --final

add_preference_set

The add_preference_set command adds a preference set to a preference profile.

SYNTAX

beectl add_preference_set --parent <preference-profile-identifier> --name <preference-set-name> [ --extends <preference-set-identifier> ]
 

OPTIONS

--parent

Identifier of the preference profile to which the preference set is added.

--name

Name of the preference set.

--extends

Identifier of the preference set from which the new preference set is extended.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_preference_set --parent prfp=MyProfile,user=user1 --name MyPreferenceSet

add_record

Adds a record or non-record.

SYNTAX

beectl add_record --artifact <identifier of the artifact to be filed as a record or non-record> { --retention_category <identifier of the URM retention category> | --record_folder <identifier of the URM record folder> } [ --no_retention <boolean specifying a record or non-record> ]
 

OPTIONS

--artifact

identifier of the artifact to be filed as a record or non-record

--retention_category

identifier of the URM retention category

--record_folder

identifier of the URM record folder

--no_retention

boolean specifying a record or non-record

EXAMPLES

beectl add_record --artifact myArtifact --retention_category myRetentionCategory --no_retention

add_remote_repository

Adds a remote repository.

SYNTAX

beectl add_remote_repository --file <Pathname to the remote repository file.>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Pathname to the remote repository file.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_remote_repository --file myRemoteRepositoryFile

add_remote_share

Adds a remote repository share.

SYNTAX

beectl add_remote_share --file <Pathname to the remote share file.>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Pathname to the remote share file.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_remote_share --file myRemoteShareFile

add_resource

Creates a new resource.

SYNTAX

beectl add_resource --name <name> --email_address <email address> --resource_type <type>         [--scope <organization>] [--capacity <capacity>] [--identifier <identifier>]         [--phone_number <phone_number>] [--website <website>] [--postal_address <postal address>]         [--timezone <timezone name>] [--location <location>]  [--add_approver <approverid>]          [--description <description>]  [--booking_info <booking info>]         [--booking_characteristics <[O]pen>|<[F]CFS>] [--custom_processing <[T]rue>|<[F]alse>]         [--accessible_by <everyone | nobody | groupid | userid> ]    beectl add_resource --external --name <name> --email_address <email address> --resource_type <type>         [--scope <organization>] [--capacity <capacity>]         [--phone_number <phone_number>] [--website <website>] [--postal_address <postal address>]         [--timezone <timezone name>] [--location <location>] [--booking_info <booking info>]         [--description <description>]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Define the unique name of the resource.

--enterprise

Deprecated option. Use --scope instead.

--resource_type

Specify the type of the resource. Specify "E", "Equipment", "O", "Other", "R" or "Room", case insensitive.

--bookableresource_type

Deprecated option. Use --resource_type instead.

--email_address

Specify the BUSINESS_1 e-mail address of the resource.

--phone_number

Specify the BUSINESS_1 phone number of the resource.

--website

Specify the BUSINESS_1 web site of the resource.

--postal_address

Specify the BUSINESS_1 postal address of the resource. The required format is: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country>. All fields are optional but at least one field must appear in a valid address of this type. For example, orapostal:l1=1, Main Street is a valid address. The ? character must not be encoded when used as a separator; it must be encoded in all other cases. For example orapostal:l1=1?l2=Which Street%3F?code=12345 is a valid address; but orapostal:l1=1?l2=Which Street??code=12345 is not a valid address because the question mark appearing as part of the address "Which Street?" is not encoded.

--identifier

Specify the identifier of the resource. The identifier can be used as an alternative to the name: such as a room or serial number.

--capacity

Specify the capacity of the resource.

--external

Create the resource as an external resource. If this option is not specified, a BookableResource will be created.

--add_approver

Resource approver to add.

--booking_characteristics

Specify resource default calendar booking characteristic. Specify [O] for Open or [F] for First Come First Serve, case insensitive.

--booking_info

Specify resource booking information. It must be a xHTML string.

--description

Specify the description of the resource. It must be a xHTML string.

--timezone

Specify the timezone of the resource.

--location

Specify the location description of the resource. It must be a xHTML string.

--scope

Specify the enterprise or organization under which this resource will be created. Will default to the current enterprise.

--custom_processing

Specify if this resource requires custom processing. Specify "T", "True", "F" or "False", case insensitive.

--accessible_by

Specify who can access this resource. It must be one of "everyone", "nobody", a group id or finally a user id, case insensitive. Use "everyone" to reset the accessibility to the default for the resource.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_resource --name "Resource1" --email_address resource1@example.com --resource_type "room" --identifier "us:OP200:20P74" --capacity 8 --timezone "America/Los_Angeles"

add_role_definition

Creates a RoleDefinition entity.

SYNTAX

beectl add_role_definition [--scope <unique identifier of the Scope>] --name <name of RoleDefinition> [--description <description>] [[--privilege <privilege name>]...] [--access_types <access types string>] [--always_enabled <boolean value>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Specify the unique identifier of the Scope in which the RoleDefinition should be created.

--name

Specify the name of the RoleDefinition.

--description

Specify a description for the RoleDefinition.

--privilege

G">Workspace name</optich will be granted by the RoleDefinition. This option can be specified more than once.

--access_types

Specify the access types string for the RoleDefinition.

--always_enabled

Specify this option to mark the RoleDefinition as always enabled.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_role_definition --scope wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyRoleDefinition

add_search_recovery_scope

Recovers the search index for Entities of the specified types, in the specified Scope, and which were last modified between the specified dates.

SYNTAX

beectl add_search_recovery_scope --scope <Recover the search index for this scope.> [--entity_type <Recover search index for this entities of this type.>] [--start_date <Recover search index for entities modified on or after this date.  If not specified, 30 days before the present will be used as the start date.>] [--end_date <Recover search index for entities modified before or on this date.  If not specified, the present will be used as the end date.>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Recover the search index for this scope.

--entity_type

Recover search index for this entities of this type.

--start_date

Recover search index for entities modified on or after this date. If not specified, 30 days before the present will be used as the start date.

--end_date

Recover search index for entities modified before or on this date. If not specified, the present will be used as the end date.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_search_recovery_scope --scope 1CF3:35AF:orgn:6828B43CD3944E06A5CD425F0225CF2500000000004C --entity_type adoc --entity_type emsg --start_date 2008-07-10T00:00:00 --end_date 2010-04-21T00:00:00

add_sensitivity

Creates a Sensitivity entity.

SYNTAX

beectl add_sensitivity --workspace <unique identifier of the Workspace> --name <name of Sensitivity> [--description <description>] [--sensitivity_only <boolean value>] [--delegatable <boolean value>]
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Specify the unique identifier of the Workspace in which the Sensitivity should be created.

--name

Specify the name of the Sensitivity.

--description

Specify a description for the Sensitivity.

--sensitivity_only

Specify the SensitivityOnly option for the Sensitivity.

--delegatable

Specify the Delegatable option for the Sensitivity.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_sensitivity --workspace wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MySensitivity

add_sensitivity_ace

Adds an Access Control Entry (ACE) to a Sensitivity entity's Sensitivity ACL (SACL).

SYNTAX

beectl add_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity <unique identifier of the entity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor> [--access_types <access types string>]
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity to which the ACE will be added.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of an Accessor to whom the access types will apply.

--access_types

Specify the access types string for the Accessor.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser --access_types +RW-D

add_team_workspace

Creates a team workspace from a template

SYNTAX

beectl add_team_workspace --name <Workspace name> --scope <Identifier of enterprise or organization> [--template <Workspace template identifier>] [--file <Full path of the input file>]  [--email_address <Team workspace email address>] [--description <Description>][--participation_mode <Team workspace participation mode. Value can be INVITE_ONLY, OPEN, or APPROVE_REQUIRED>] [--directory_listed <TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE>] [--hard_quota <Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --soft_quota <Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--public_access_role <Role definition identifier for public access>]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Workspace name

--scope

Identifier of enterprise or organization

--template

Workspace template identifier

--file

Full path of the input file

--email_address

Team workspace email address

--description

Description

--participation_mode

Team workspace participation mode. Value can be INVITE_ONLY, OPEN, or APPROVE_REQUIRED

--directory_listed

TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE

--hard_quota

Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--soft_quota

Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--public_access_role

Role definition identifier for public access. If not specified, the team workspace to create is not for public access

EXAMPLES

beectl add_team_workspace --scope enpr=test_enterprise --name My_Team_worksapce --hard_quota UNLIMITED --soft_quota 100

beectl add_team_workspace --scope orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --template wstp=test_team_ws_template,enpr=test_enterprise --file /tmp/input.xml --hard_quota 1000 --soft_quota 100 --email_address teamworkspace@company.com

add_team_workspace_template_application

Transforms the given team workspace to conform to the given team workspace template

SYNTAX

beectl add_team_workspace_template_application --template <Workspace template identifier> --workspace <Workspace identifier> --file <Full path of the template file>
 

OPTIONS

--template

Workspace template identifier

--workspace

Workspace identifier

--file

Full path of the input file

EXAMPLES

beectl add_team_workspace_template_application --template wstp=test_team_ws_template,enpr=test_enterprise --workspace wksp=test_team_ws,enpr=test_enterprise --file /tmp/template_variable_values.xml

add_team_workspace_template_evolution

Applies the latest snapshot of the given team workspace template to all the team workspaces to which the template was applied earlier

SYNTAX

beectl add_team_workspace_template_evolution --template <Workspace template identifier> --limit <Maximum number of workspaces to upgrade> --file <Full path of the template file>
 

OPTIONS

--template

Workspace template identifier

--limit

Maximum number of workspaces to upgrade

--file

Full path of the input file

EXAMPLES

beectl add_team_workspace_template_evolution --template wstp=test_team_ws_template,enpr=test_enterprise --limit 100 --file /tmp/template_variable_values_and_update_options.xml

add_trusted_identity

This command registers a trusted identity. There are two types of trusted identities: WSSEC and SES. Default type is WSSEC. For WSSEC type, please make sure that the service has a valid certificate registered in the wallet and the correct associated key alias is passed into this command. This command also creates the principal(s) associated with this trusted identity in the Beehive system. On the other hand, for SES type, this command stores the given trusted identity name and password information.

SYNTAX

beectl add_trusted_identity  [--type WSSEC --is_service <boolean> [--key_alias <Key Alias>] --service_name <Trusted Identity Name>] [--type S2S --password <Trusted Identity Password> --service_name <Trusted Identity Name>] [--type SES --name <Trusted Entity Name> --password <Trusted Entity Password>]
 

OPTIONS

--key_alias

The alias of the service which is used to register the certificate in the wallet. This option is mandatory if registering a web service, i.e. if is_service is true and type is WSSEC. For all other cases, this is not a mandatory option.

--is_service

Boolean value, true if this is a service. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--service_name

String value of the service principal name with which it will be identified in Beehive. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--type

String value indicating the type of trusted identity: SES or WSSEC.SES refers to Secure Enterprise Search. WSSEC refers to Web services security.

--name

String value representing the name of the SES trusted entity.

--password

Secure string value representing the password of the SES trusted entity.

EXAMPLES

add_urm

Configures an agent for a URM instance.

SYNTAX

beectl add_urm --rm_admin_name <RM Admin Name for the URM instance.>  --rm_admin_password <RM Admin Pass for the URM instance.>  --urm_url <The URL for the URM instance.> --rm_email_admin <Email Id of the RM administrator.> [ --disposition_loader_interval <The Disposition Loader Interval for the URM instance.> ] [ --disposition_processor_interval <The Disposition Processor Interval for the URM instance.> ] [ --agent_name <The Agent Name for the URM instance.> ]
 

OPTIONS

--rm_admin_name

RM Admin Name for the URM instance.

--rm_admin_password

RM Admin Pass for the URM instance.

--urm_url

The URL for the URM instance.

--disposition_loader_interval

The Disposition Loader Interval for the URM instance.

--disposition_processor_interval

The Disposition Processor Interval for the URM instance.

--agent_name

The Agent Name for the URM instance.

--rm_email_admin

Email Id of the RM administrator.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_urm --rm_admin_name myRmAdminName --rm_admin_password myRmAdminObfuscatedPassword --urm_url myUrmUrl --disposition_loader_interval myDispositionLoaderInterval --disposition_processor_interval myDispositionProcessorInterval --agent_name myAgentName --rm_email_admin 2312:2525:user:25252AB25215515155

add_user

The add_user command adds new users. The user information is supplied either on command line or in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl add_user    {        --family_name <[locale:]family name>        [ --family_name <[locale:]family name> ... ]        --scope <identifier of users parent>        --login_id <login_id>        --login_password <password>        [ --given_name <[locale:]given name> ... ]        [ --display_name <[locale:]display name> ... ]       [ --middle_name <[locale:]middle name> ... ]       [ --job_title <[locale:]job title> ... ]       [ --prefix <[locale:]prefix> ... ]        [ --suffix <[locale:]suffix> ... ]        [ --nick_name <[locale:]nick name> ... ]        [ --office_location <office location of the user> ]        [ --company <company of the user> ]        [ --profession <profession of the user> ]        [ --timezone <timezone of the user> ]        [ --locale <locale of the user> ]        [ --department <department of the user> ]        [ --assistant <assistant identifier> ]        [ --manager <manager identifier> ]        [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]        [ --voice_principal <voice devicenumber> ]        [ --voice_pin <pin> ]        [ --property <name=value=description> ... ]        [ --protocol_principal <protocol principal> ]        [ --protocol_password <protocol password> ]        [ --address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]        [ --default_address_for_type <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]        [ --default_address_for_scheme <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]        [ --primary_address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ]        [ --external_inbox <true|false> ]        [ --extended_enterprise_user <true|false> ]      |         --file <filename>   }
 

OPTIONS

--family_name

Family name of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--scope

Identifier of the enterprise or organization under which this user will be created.

--given_name

Given name of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--display_name

Display name of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--middle_name

Middle name of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--job_title

Job title of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--prefix

Prefix of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--suffix

Suffix of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--nick_name

Nick name of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--office_location

Office location of the user.

--company

Company of the user.

--profession

Profession of the user.

--timezone

Timezone of the user. list_timezones lists the valid timezones

--locale

Locale details of the user. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--department

Department of the user.

--assistant

Identifier of the assistant.

--manager

Identifier of the manager.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the user belongs to.

--property

Details of the property in the format name=value=description. Any custom property can be used. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value or description.

--address

Address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_type

Address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified type. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_scheme

Address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified scheme. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--primary_address

Primary address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--login_id

The login credentials of the user.

--login_password

Login password.

--voice_principal

Voice principal of the user.

--voice_pin

Pin number for the voice device.

--protocol_principal

Protocol principal of the user.

--protocol_password

Protocol password.

--file

Name of the file, which contains user information in XML format.

--external_inbox

Boolean if user's inbox is external or not.

--extended_enterprise_user

Boolean if user is an external user or not.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_user --family_name User1FamilyName --login_id user@example.com --login_password hioquery731419== --scope enpr=example --obfuscated

beectl add_user --family_name User1FamilyName --login_id user@example.com --login_password hioquery731419== --scope enpr=example --given_name User1GivenName --display_name "User1 Name" --organization orgn=beehive1,enpr=oracle1 --obfuscated

beectl add_user --family_name User1FamilyName --login_id user@example.com --login_password hioquery731419== --scope enpr=example --address BUSINESS_1:mailto:example@example.com --address BUSINESS_2:fax:121345222 --obfuscated

beectl add_user --family_name User1FamilyName --login_id user@example.com --login_password hioquery731419== --scope enpr=example --property notes=xxx --obfuscated

beectl add_user --family_name User1FamilyName --login_id user@example.com --login_password hioquery731419== --scope enpr=example --extended_enterprise_user true --obfuscated

beectl add_user --file Users.xml

add_user_subscription

Creates a user subscription from a pre-defined rule in a subscription template.

SYNTAX

beectl add_user_subscription --source_entity_class <sourceEntityClass of template> --rule <rule name> --attach <identifier of attached entity> --subscriber <identifier of subscriber>
 

OPTIONS

--source_entity_class

Specify the name of the source entity Class that is defined in subscription template.

--rule

"multiline"> <message fined rule or the rule statement. The format of rule statement is: RULE_STATEMENT:CONDITION:attribute1=value1,attribute2=value2, ...attribute=value,ACTION:attribute1=value1,attribute2=value2, ...attribute=value

--attach

Specify the Identifier of the entity to which the subscription is attached.

--subscriber

Specify the identifier of the subscriber who owns the subscription.

--name

Specify the name of the subscription to be created.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_user_subscription --source_entity_class Invitation --attach 5457:7954:clnd:5B5DB5E3F6652295E040578C92165D03000000006740 --subscriber user=user1 --rule NOTIFY_ON_ANY_UPDATED_INVITATION

beectl add_user_subscription --source_entity_class Message --attach 5457:7954:wspr:5B5DB5E3F6652295E040578C92165D03000000000456 --subscriber user=user1 --name MyServerSideRule_1 --rule RULE_STATEMENT:CONDITION:created_any_from_contains=beehive,created_any_subject_contains=build,ACTION:move_to=5457:7954:afrh:5B5DB5E3F6652295E040578C92165D03000000000440,forward_to=test.user@oracle.com

add_version_configuration

Creates a version configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

SYNTAX

beectl add_version_configuration --container <Configuration scope or heterogenous folder> --file <Full path of the configuration XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--container

Scope or heterogenous folder on which the version configuration should be defined.

--file

Full path of the version configuration XML file. The file must contain properly formatted data.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_version_configuration --container orgn=MyOrganization,enpr=MyEnterprise --file /tmp/configuration.xml

add_virus_scan_engine

Adds a new virus scan engine to the collection of engines configured for the Site. If this is the first scan engine being added, this command will create a new collection for the Site and add the virus scan engine to it.

SYNTAX

beectl add_virus_scan_engine [ --hostname <scanengine_hostname> ] [ --port <scanengine_port> ] [ --validate_connection <true/false> ]
 

OPTIONS

--hostname

Name of the host where the virus scan engine is installed. Default is localhost.

--port

Port number used by the virus scan engine for communication with its clients. Default is 1344.

--validate_connection

Indicates if the connection to the virus scan engine needs to be validated.

EXAMPLES

<beectl add_virus_scan_engine --hostname scanenginehost.example.com --port 1344 --validate_connection true>

add_voice_facility

Creates a voice facility by associating phone rules with an already created group. The command may be run multiple times and each new execution will append new rules to existing rules for a given group collabid.

SYNTAX

beectl add_voice_facility --group_collabid <collabid> [--include <phone rules>] [--exclude <phone rules>]
 

OPTIONS

--group_collabid

The collabid of the group to associate with the given phone number rules.

--include

The collection of phone number rules to describe what phone numbers to include in the given facility. The rules are delimited by pipes.

--exclude

The collection of phone number rules to describe what phone numbers to EXCLUDE in the given facility. The rules are delimited by pipes.

EXAMPLES

beectl add_voice_facility --group_collabid grup=GroupName,enpr=MyEnterprise --include 1312???????|1713??????? --exclude 13129??????|17139??????

append_value

Appends the specified value to the existing value of the named property. If the named property value is cleared before executing this command, then after executing this command it will contain the new value.

Note :- Option value should not start with hyphen(-). If an option value starts with hyphen, use any one of the following syntaxes. 1. Use <option-name>=<option value> format. This is the preferred way to specify the option values starting with hypens. 2. Prepend the option value with string "ESCAPE:". 3. Prepend the option value with backslash "\\". This is the least preferred way. This may not work in some platforms, esp in windows platforms it will not work.

SYNTAX

beectl append_value --component <system object identifier or alias> --name <name> --value <value>...
 

OPTIONS

--component

component id.

--name

Name of the property.

--value

Value of the property.

EXAMPLES

The command execution below would modify the log level for code in module oracle.ocs.commandline to FINEST and code in module oracle.ocs.management to FINE. These new settings are appended to existing list of package names in the ModuleLogLevel property of the LoggingProperties config object in current site. If the ModuleLogLevel property was cleared before executing this command, then it will contain the new values now.

beectl append_value --component _CURRENT_SITE:LoggingProperties --name "ModuleLogLevel" --value "oracle.ocs.commandline:FINEST" --value "oracle.ocs.management:FINE"

clear_calendar_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified calendar.

SYNTAX

beectl clear_calendar_permissions  { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> | --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } [--user <userid> | --group <groupid>]
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--user

Specify the unique identifier of the user (grantee).

--group

Specify the unique identifier of the group (grantee).

EXAMPLES

beectl clear_calendar_permissions --calendarowner user1@example.com --user user=user2

clear_proposed_configuration

Clears proposed configuration of the Beehive system object model

SYNTAX

beectl clear_proposed_configuration 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl clear_proposed_configuration

clear_tasklist_permissions

Reset the access permissions of a tasklist to their out-of-box defaults.

SYNTAX

beectl clear_tasklist_permissions  { --tasklist <tasklistid> | --tasklistowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> | --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } [--user <userid> | --group <groupid>]
 

OPTIONS

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of a tasklist.

--tasklistowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or team workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format 'scheme:value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto is assumed.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--user

Specify the unique identifier of the target user.

--group

Specify the unique identifier of the target group.

EXAMPLES

beectl clear_tasklist_permissions --tasklistowner user1@example.com --user user=user2

clone_midtier

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier.

SYNTAX

beectl clone_midtier --ias_instance_name <ias instance name > --host_name <host name> --db_schema_password <db schema password> [--oui_inv_ptr_loc <oui data>]  [--oracle_home_name <oracle home name>] [--do_not_start_at_end] --site_key <Site key> [--ignore_validation_warnings]
 

OPTIONS

--ias_instance_name

Ias instance name with out appending host name. For example "myinstance"

--host_name

Fully qualified host name of the new midtier.

--db_schema_password

Beehive database schema password.

--oui_inv_ptr_loc

Oracle inventory pointer location file. Location of Oracle inventory is present in this file. If not specified, a platform default value (/etc/oraInst.loc on Linux) is checked. If the platform default value does not exists, then Oracle Inventory is created in user's home directory.

--oracle_home_name

Oracle home name. The default value is the value for --ias_instance_name option.

--do_not_start_at_end

If specified, beehive components will not be started at the end.

--site_key

Site key value.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl clone_midtier --ias_instance_name MyIASInstance --host_name machine1.example.com --db_schema_password dbbeehiveschemapassword --site_key <Site key>

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

clone_oc4j_instance

Creates a new oc4j instance by cloning the given oc4j instance.

Most of properties of the newly created oc4j instance is similar to that of the source oc4j instance.

All the service instance present in the source oc4j instance system model is deployed into the newly cloned oc4j instance.

Further, after deploying all the service instances, newly cloned oc4j instance is bouned once.

Only Beehive oc4j instances should be cloned using this command. Non Beehive oc4j instances can't be cloned using this command

Beehive Management oc4j instance should not be cloned. This command will error out when management oc4j instance is cloned.

When a template is associated with the Beehive instance, then target oc4j name can't be specified and disable_sizing option should be specified.

SYNTAX

beectl clone_oc4j_instance [--source_oc4j_instance_id <source oc4j instance system model id> | --source_oc4j_instance_name <source oc4j instance name>] [--target_oc4j_instance_name <target oc4j instance name>] [--disable_sizing] [--cold_mode]
 

OPTIONS

--source_oc4j_instance_id

Source oc4j instance system model id.

--source_oc4j_instance_name

Source oc4j instance name.

--target_oc4j_instance_name

Target oc4j instance name.

--disable_sizing

Disable sizing.

--cold_mode

Clone the target oc4j instance in cold mode. Target oc4j instance will be started only at the end of flow.

EXAMPLES

beectl clone_oc4j_instance --source_oc4j_instance_name BEEAPP --target_oc4j_instance_name BEEAPP_CLONE

beectl clone_oc4j_instance --source_oc4j_instance_name BEEAPP --disable_sizing

clone_patching

Upgrades the midtier by cloning.

SYNTAX

beectl clone_patching ([--old_oracle_home <old oracle home>] |[--local_beehive_instance_id <local beehive instance id > --db_schema_password <schema password > --site_key <Site key > ])[--oui_inv_ptr_loc <oui data >] [--start_at_end] [--ignore_validation_warnings]
 

OPTIONS

--old_oracle_home

Specify the old oracle home.

--local_beehive_instance_id

Local beehive instance system object id.

--db_schema_password

Password to connect to config database.

--site_key

Site key value.

--oui_inv_ptr_loc

Oracle inventory pointer location file. Location of Oracle inventory is present in this file. If not specified, a platform default value (/etc/oraInst.loc on Linux) is checked. If the platform default value does not exists, then Oracle Inventory is created in user's home directory.

--start_at_end

If specified, beehive components will be started at the end.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl clone_patching local_beehive_instance_iddb_schema_password instance1.machibe-b.example.com local_beehive_instance_idsite_key <secure value> local_beehive_instance_id{5} <secure value>

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

clone_preparation

Prepares the existing oracle home for cloning.

SYNTAX

beectl clone_preparation --file <output file name> [--ignore_validation_warnings]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Fully qualified name of the file which will store the list of files to be cloned. This files has to be outside the oracle home.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl clone_preparation --file /tmp/clone-list.txt

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

clone_site

Top level clone command that clones a mid-tier in a new deployment (i.e., site). This command is part of the Deployment Cloning solution. Please see the administrator guide for details.

SYNTAX

beectl clone_site --ias_instance_name <ias instance name > --host_name <host name> --db_schema_password <db schema password> --db_connect_string <db connect String>  [--oui_inv_ptr_loc <oui data>] [--db_schema_name <db schema name>]  [(--db_rac_node_information <XA Service name>) ...] [(--db_xa_service_name <rac node information>) ...] [--retain_rac_node_information] [--oracle_home_name <oracle home name>]  [--do_not_start_at_end] [--site_name <New site name>] --site_key <Site key> [--ignore_validation_warnings]
 

OPTIONS

--ias_instance_name

Ias instance name with out appending host name. For example "myinstance"

--host_name

Fully qualified host name of the new midtier.

--db_connect_string

Beehive database connect string.

--db_schema_password

Beehive database schema password.

--db_schema_name

Beehive database schema name.

--db_rac_node_information

Beehive database RAC node information. It should be of the format hostname:port. For eg sample.com:1521

--db_xa_service_name

Beehive database XA service name.

--retain_rac_node_information

Retains the old rac node and ons information. By default old rac node information is removed.

--oracle_home_name

Oracle home name. The default value is the value provided for --ias_instance_name option.

--oui_inv_ptr_loc

Oracle inventory pointer location file. Location of Oracle inventory is present in this file. If not specified, a platform default value (/etc/oraInst.loc on Linux) is checked. If the platform default value does not exists, then Oracle Inventory is created in user's home directory.

--do_not_start_at_end

If specified, beehive components will not be started at the end.

--site_name

New site name

--site_key

Site key value.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl clone_site --ias_instance_name MyIASInstance --host_name machine1.example.com --db_schema_password dbbeehiveschemapassword --db_connect_string "(DESCRIPTION=(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=machine2.example.com)(PORT=1521))(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVICE_NAME=oracle))" --db_schema_name MySchema --retain_rac_node_information --site_key <site key>

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

delete_assigned_role

Deletes an AssignedRole entity.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_assigned_role --assigned_role <unique identifier of the AssignedRole>
 

OPTIONS

--assigned_role

Specify the unique identifier of the AssignedRole to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_assigned_role --assigned_role acar=MyAssignedRole,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_attendant

Deletes an auto attendant by name.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_attendant --name <name of attendant>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the attendant to delete.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_attendant --name my_attendant

delete_attendant_prompt

Deletes a prompt.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_attendant_prompt --name <attendant name> --type <prompt type> --language <prompt language>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the attendant to which the prompt belongs.

--type

The type of the prompt. Can be one of language, menu, greeting, extension-prompt, extension-nomatch, option1, option2, option3, option4, option4, option5, option6, option7, option8, option9, noinput, noinput-term, nomatch, nomatch-term.

--language

The language of the prompt.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_attendant_prompt --name myAttendant --type greeting --language en_US

beectl delete_attendant_prompt --name myAttendant --type language

delete_audit_policy

Deletes an existing audit

SYNTAX

beectl delete_audit_policy --policy <Audit policy identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--policy

Audit policy identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_audit_policy --policy plcy=MyAuditPolicy

delete_audit_trail

Deletes an existing audit trail

SYNTAX

beectl delete_audit_trail --trail <Audit trail identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--trail

Audit trail identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_audit_trail --trail autr=MyAuditTrail

delete_category

Deletes a category and all category applications.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_category --category <Identifier of the category to be deleted>
 

OPTIONS

--category

Specify the identifier of the category.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_category --category catg=Resource_US,catg=Resource_ROOT,enpr=bee_ent

delete_category_application

Removes a category from an entity

SYNTAX

beectl delete_category_application --category <Identifier of the category to be removed>  --entity <Identifier of the entity from which the category needs to be removed>  
 

OPTIONS

--category

Specify the identifier of the category to be removed.

--entity

Specify the identifier of an Oracle Beehive entity from which the category needs to be removed.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_category_application --category catg=MyCategory,enpr=MyEnterprise --entity adoc=MyDocument,fldr=MyFolder,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_category_configuration

Deletes a given category configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_category_configuration --configuration <Configuration identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

Category configuration to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_category_configuration --configuration 9941:2345:ctcf:58D193D162CE4ED89FF66AB4E55745B6345464545453

delete_client_application

Deletes a client application.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_client_application --application <identifier of the client application>
 

OPTIONS

--application

Specify the identifier of the client application. Use list_client_applications command to determine the identifier of the client application.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_client_application --application 1234:5678:capn:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_client_application_configuration

Deletes the client application configuration with the given identifier.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_client_application_configuration --configuration <identifier of the client application configuration>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

Specify the identifier of the client application configuration.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_client_application_configuration --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_client_application_patchset

Deletes a client application patchset.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_client_application_patchset --patchset <identifier of the client application patchset>
 

OPTIONS

--patchset

Specify the identifier of the client application patchset. Use list_client_application_patchsets command to determine the identifier of a client application patchset.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_client_application_patchset --patchset 1234:5678:capp:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_client_application_provisioning

De-provisions client applications from a community.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_client_application_provisioning --community <community identifier> {--configuration <client application configuration identifier>... | --all}
 

OPTIONS

--community

Specify the identifier of the community.

--configuration

Specify the identifier of the client application configuration. This option can be specified more than once.

--all

Specify this option to deprovision any client applications provisioned earlier. The users belonging to this community would get the applications provisioned at the parent community level.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

beectl delete_client_application_provisioning --community enpr=myEnterprise --all

delete_client_application_version

Deletes a client application version.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_client_application_version --application_version <identifier of the client application version>
 

OPTIONS

--application_version

Specify the identifier of the client application version. Use list_client_application_versions command to determine the identifier of a client application version.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_client_application_version --application_version 1234:5678:capv:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_coexistence_profile

Deletes the coexistence profile of user.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_coexistence_profile {--user <user_identifier>|--email <user_email>|--file <file_name>}
 

OPTIONS

--user

Specify the identifier of the user.

--email

Specify the email address of the user.

--file

Specify the xml input file. File encoding MUST be UTF-8.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_coexistence_profile --user user=userid

beectl delete_coexistence_profile --file users.xml

delete_coexistence_system

Deletes a coexisting remote system. WARNING: This command will purge the coexisting remote system and clean all related data.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_coexistence_system --select_by_name <connector_name>
 

OPTIONS

--select_by_name

Specify the name of the coexisting remote system.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_coexistence_system --select_by_name ex-101

delete_conference

Deletes conference artifact under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl delete_conference --conference_id <Conference identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--conference_id

Conference identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_conference --conference_id owch=MyConference,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_conference_template

Deletes conference template artifact under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl delete_conference_template --template_id <Conference identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--template_id

Conference identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_conference_template --template_id owct=MyTemplate,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_custom_user_property

The delete_custom_user_property command deletes a custom property. If there are multiple custom properties with same name, then only the first occurrence of the attribute with specified name is deleted. Any values of the property being deleted will also be deleted.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_custom_user_property --name <name> 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Property name. Example: employeenumber.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_custom_user_property --name employeenumber

delete_device

Deletes the device with the given identifier.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_device --device <identifier of the device>
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_device --device 1234:5678:devi:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_device_profile

Deletes the device profile or device profiles. The command can delete the device profile with the given identifier or with the given device profile name or delete the device profiles specified from the given file containing names of the device profiles. The command can also optionally delete all the device types associated with this device profile.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_device_profile {--profile <identifier of the device profile>|--profile_name <name of the device profile>|--file <file containing device profiles>} [--delete_device_types]
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Identifier of the device profile.

--profile_name

Name of the device profile.

--file

File containing the names of the device profiles. Specify the full path and file name.

--delete_device_types

Deletes all the device types associated with this device profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_device_profile --profile 1234:5678:devp:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

beectl delete_device_profile --profile 1234:5678:devp:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --delete_device_types

beectl delete_device_profile --profile_name "Device Profile Name" --delete_device_types

beectl delete_device_profile --file /tmp/deleted_profiles.txt --delete_device_types

delete_device_type

Deletes the device type with the given identifier.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_device_type --type <identifier of the device type>
 

OPTIONS

--type

Identifier of the device type.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_device_type --type 1234:5678:devt:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

delete_directory_profile

The delete_directory_profile command deletes a directory profile.

Changelog number for the directory profile is not deleted from beehive, unless the activate_configuration option is used. To delete the changelog number from beehive, run this command by specifying the common option activate_configuration with value as true.

The command deletes a directory profile if no users or groups are associated with the profile in beehive.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_directory_profile --profile <profile-name> 
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Profile name to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_directory_profile --profile MyDirectoryProfile

delete_dmz_home_instance

Removes configuration for a Beehive installation in the DMZ that is, outside the firewall.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_dmz_home_instance --id <dmz beehive instance id>
 

OPTIONS

--id

Identifier for DMZ beehive instance.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_dmz_home_instance --id dmz_on_server1

delete_email_message

Moves an email message to a target folder or removes it outright

SYNTAX

beectl delete_email_message --internet_message_id <The Message-ID header in  the MIME source of the message> [--email_address <The email address of the admin user account that the deleted message  should be moved to>] [--folder <The folder name of the admin user account that the deleted message should be moved to>]
 

OPTIONS

--internet_message_id

The Message-ID header in the MIME source of the message

--email_address

The email address of the admin user account that the deleted message should be moved to

--folder

The folder name of the admin user account that the deleted message should be moved to

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_email_message --internet_message_id 200602221113.k1MBDZDr020197@rgminet03.oracle.com --email_address user1@example.com --folder Recalled

delete_event_subscription

Deletes an event subscription from the Oracle Beehive repository.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_event_subscription --subscription <identifier of the event subscription to be deleted>
 

OPTIONS

--subscription

Specify the identifier of the event subscription to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_event_subscription --subscription 9941:2345:enpr:58D193D162CE4ED89FF66AB4E55745B6345464545453

delete_expertise_user_scope

The delete_expertise_user_scope command deletes expertise user scope. The expertise user scope CollabId/BODN is supplied with --expertise_user_scope option.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_expertise_user_scope --expertise_user_scope <BODN or CollabId>
 

OPTIONS

--expertise_user_scope

CollabId or BODN format of the expertise user scope to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_expertise_user_scope --expertise_user_scope exus=ExpertiseUserScopeName,enpr=Oracle

beectl delete_expertise_user_scope --expertise_user_scope 416E:25BF:exus:6A9CBED7822AA32EE040578C5C8453AB000000018705

delete_failed_action_events

Purge actions that have not completed successfully.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_failed_action_events --bucket <Partition number> --sequence <Sequence number>
 

OPTIONS

--bucket

Partition number

--sequence

Sequence number

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_failed_action_events --bucket MyBucketNumber --sequence MySequenceNumber

delete_feed_configuration

The delete_feed_configuration command deletes feed configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_feed_configuration    {        --feed_configuration <feed configuration>      | --scope <scope identifier>       --feedtype <feed type >    }
 

OPTIONS

--feed_configuration

Collabid of the feed configuration to be modified

--scope

Scope in which the feed configuration will be created

--feedtype

Feed type of the feed configuration. Permitted values are ANNOUNCEMENT, FORUM, FOLDER, LABEL, RECENT, TOPIC and VERSION.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_feed_configuration --scope enpr=example --feedtype RECENT

beectl delete_feed_configuration --feed_configuration 6790:39AC:afrf:52921E226193384EE040578C5C84269C0000000ABB75

delete_filesystem_reference

Removes a filesystem reference from Beehive.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_filesystem_reference --filesystem_reference_id <Identifier of the filesystem reference>
 

OPTIONS

--filesystem_reference_id

Identifier of the filesystem reference to delete.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_filesystem_reference --filesystem_reference_id fsref=MyFilesystemReference,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_group

The delete_group command deletes a group with an option to purge.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_group { --group <group_identifier> | --email <group_email> } [ --purge ] 
 

OPTIONS

--group

Identifier of the group.

--email

EmailID of the group.

--purge

Purges the group after deletion.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_group --group grup=MyGroup,enpr=Example

beectl delete_group --group grup=MyGroup,enpr=Example --purge

delete_ischedule_server

Delete a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_ischedule_server --name <name> 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the remote server configuration, can contain only alpha numerical characters, underscores and dashes.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_ischedule_server --name remoteserver

delete_local_ace

Deletes an Access Control Entry (ACE) from the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_local_ace --entity <unique identifier of the entity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor>
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity from which the ACE will be deleted.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of the accessor to whom the access types were applied.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_local_ace --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser

delete_oc4j_instance

Deletes the specified oc4j.

The command can delete an oc4j only if there are other oc4j instances of the same type. For example any of the oc4j instances BEEAPP, BEEAPP_1, BEEAPP_2 can be deleted however the last remaining oc4j instance of a type cannot be deleted otherwise the active deployment template is violated.

This command can be executed to delete either a local oc4j or a beekeeper home.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_oc4j_instance --component <system object id of oc4j>
 

OPTIONS

--component

Deletes the specified oc4j.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_oc4j_instance --component 946189a0-bd98-4033-b342-7d51087ccc81

delete_organization

Deletes an existing organization, and sub-organizations and workspaces under it (with --force_cascade option). And/or purges deleted organization manually (with --purge option). Use list_deleted_organizations to get the CENs of deleted organizations.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_organization --organization <Organization identifier> [--purge] [--force_cascade]
 

OPTIONS

--organization

Organization identifier

--purge

Purge deleted organization manually

--force_cascade

Force deleting sub-organizations and workspaces under this workspace

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_organization --organization orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise

delete_policy

Deletes a policy.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_policy --policy <identifier of the policy to be deleted> 
 

OPTIONS

--policy

Specify the identifier of the policy to be deleted. Use the list_policies command to obtain the policy identifier.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_policy --policy plcy=MyPolicy,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_policy_action

Deletes a policy action.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_policy_action --action_name <name of action to be deleted>
 

OPTIONS

--action_name

Specify the name of the policy action to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_policy_action --action_name MyActionName

delete_policy_schema

Deletes a policy schema.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_policy_schema --policy_schema <identifier of the policy schema to be deleted> 
 

OPTIONS

--policy_schema

Specify the identifier of the policy schema to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_policy_schema --policy_schema plsh=PolicySchemaName

delete_policy_template

Deletes a policy template.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_policy_template --policy_template <identifier of the policy template to be deleted> 
 

OPTIONS

--policy_template

Specify the identifier of the policy template to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_policy_template --policy_template plct=PolicyTemplateName,enpr=oracle

delete_preference_profile

The delete_preference_profile command deletes a preference profile.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_preference_profile --profile <Preference profile identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Identifier of the preference profile to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_preference_profile --profile prfp=MyProfile,user=user1

delete_preference_property

The delete_preference_property command deletes a preference property from a preference set.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_preference_property --set <set-identifier> --name <property-name>
 

OPTIONS

--set

Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.

--name

Name of the preference property.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_preference_property --set prfs=set1,user=user1 --name MyProperty

delete_preference_set

The delete_preference_set command deletes a preference set.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_preference_set --set <set-identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--set

Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_preference_set --set prfs=set1,user=user1

delete_property

Clears the value of specified property in the configuration object identified by specified id.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_property --component <system object identifier or alias> --name <property name>
 

OPTIONS

--component

Identifier of a configuration object. The list_components command can be used to lookup the identifier

--name

The property to be cleared.

EXAMPLES

The command execution shown below would clear the value of Alias property of the current site.

beectl delete_property --component _CURRENT_SITE --name Alias

delete_record

"user-info">Command:non-record.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_record --artifact <identifier of the artifact to be deleted as a record/non-record>
 

OPTIONS

--artifact

identifier of the artifact to be deleted as a record/non-record

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_record --artifact myArtifact

delete_remote_home_instance

Deletes the specified beehive home from central configuration repository.

This command is a safeguard that will allow a beehive instance to be removed from the repository when no other uninstall options are available.

The command can only delete a remote home instance, ie, not the instance the command is being run from.

The command only cleans up the central configuration repository. It neither cleans up the disk/file system for the deleted beehive instance nor updates the oracle inventory on the remote host.

This command can be executed to delete either a non-local beehive home or a beekeeper home. To delete a dmz home please execute the command delete_dmz_home_instance

SYNTAX

beectl delete_remote_home_instance --component <system object id of remote home>
 

OPTIONS

--component

Deletes the specified beehive home from central configuration repository.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_remote_home_instance --component 946189a0-bd98-4033-b342-7d51087ccc81

delete_remote_repository

Deletes a remote repository.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_remote_repository --scope <Remote Repository Container.> --name <Remote Repository Name.>
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Repository Container.

--name

Remote Repository Name.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_remote_repository --scope myRemoteRepositoryScope --name myRemoteRepositoryName

delete_remote_share

Deletes a remote share.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_remote_share --scope <Remote Share Container.> --name <Remote Share Name.>
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Share Container.

--name

Remote Share Name.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_remote_share --scope myRemoteShareScope --name myRemoteShareName

delete_resources

Deletes a resource.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_resources {--resource <resourceid> | --select_by_name <name>} [--external]
 

OPTIONS

--resource

Specify the identifier of the resource. Use list_resources command to obtain the identifier of the resource.

--select_by_name

Specify the name criteria of the resource.

--external

Delete an external resource. If this option is not specified, bookable resources will be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_resources --resource 395A:346B:bkrs:2C5F7E98E076D382E040578CA60B0D0E000000062327

delete_role_definition

Deletes a RoleDefinition entity.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_role_definition --role_definition <unique identifier of the RoleDefinition>
 

OPTIONS

--role_definition

Specify the unique identifier of the RoleDefinition to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_role_definition --role_definition acrd=MyRoleDefinition,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_sensitivity

Deletes a Sensitivity entity.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_sensitivity --sensitivity <unique identifier of the Sensitivity>
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_sensitivity --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

delete_sensitivity_ace

Deletes an Access Control Entry (ACE) from the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity entity.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity <unique identifier of the Sensitivity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor>
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity from which the ACE will be deleted.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of the accessor to whom the access types were applied.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser

delete_trusted_identity

This command unregisters a trusted identity. If the type of identity is not specified, it is defaulted to WSSEC.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_trusted_identity [--type WSSEC --service_name <Trusted Identity Name>] [--type S2S --service_name <Trusted Identity Name>] [--type SES --name <Trusted Entity Name>]
 

OPTIONS

--service_name

String value of the service principal name with which it will be identified in Beehive. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--type

String value indicating the type of trusted identity: SES or WSSEC.SES refers to Secure Enterprise Search. WSSEC refers to Web services security.

--name

String value representing the name of the SES trusted entity.

EXAMPLES

delete_user

The delete_user command deletes a user with an option to purge.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_user { --user <user_identifier> | --email <user_email> } [ --purge ]
 

OPTIONS

--user

Identifier of the user. When purging an already deleted user, the user must be specified in id format. The value in id format can be determined by running list_users command as: list_users --attribute_name STATUS --attribute_type ATTRIBUTE --attribute_value DELETED --entity_format id.

--email

EmailID of the user.

--purge

Purges the user after deletion.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_user --user user=user1

beectl delete_user --user user=user1 --purge

delete_version_configuration

Deletes a given version configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_version_configuration --configuration <Configuration identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

Version configuration to be deleted.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_version_configuration --configuration 9941:2345:avcg:58D193D162CE4ED89FF66AB4E55745B6345464545453

delete_virus_scan_engine

Deletes specified virus scan engine from the collection of engines configured for the Site. If this is the last scan engine being deleted, this command will also delete the virus scan engine collection and update the Site to remove the virus scan engine collection from it. Either the scan_engine option or the hostname and port options will need to be specified.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_virus_scan_engine { --scan_engine <scanengine_systemid> | { --hostname <scanengine_hostname> --port <scanengine_port> }}
 

OPTIONS

--scan_engine

Identifier of the scan engine to be deleted.

--hostname

Name of the host where the virus scan engine is installed.

--port

Port number used by the virus scan engine for communication with its clients.

EXAMPLES

<beectl delete_virus_scan_engine --scan_engine 12345>

<beectl delete_virus_scan_engine --hostname scanenginehost.example.com --port 1344>

delete_virus_scan_results

Deletes virus scan results from the system that match the specified criteria. Option scandate cannot be specified with options scandate_from or scandate_to.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_virus_scan_results [ [ --scandate <scandate> ] | [ --scandate_from <scandate_from> ] [ --scandate_to <scandate_to> ] ] [ --virus_name <virus_name> ] [ --virus_id <virus_id> ] [ --entity_type <entity_type> ] [ --obsolete_only <true/false> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--scandate

Value specified will be used to do an exact match with the scan date attribute of the scan results.

--scandate_from

Value specified will be used as the lower inclusive bound for matching with the scan date.

--scandate_to

Value specified will be used as the upper inclusive bound for matching with the scan date.

--virus_name

Value specified will be used to do an exact match with the virus name attribute of the scan results.

--virus_id

Value specified will be used to do an exact match with the virus id attribute of the scan results.

--entity_type

Value specified will be used to pick up only the scan results for the entered entity type.

--obsolete_only

This option returns matches found for the specified criteria only for those entities that are obsolete, i.e. these entities no longer exists in the system.

EXAMPLES

<beectl delete_virus_scan_results --scandate_from 2008-07-10T00:00:00 --scandate_to 2008-07-10T23:59:59>

delete_voice_facility

Removes specific rules or all rules for a given group collabid. To remove specific rules, then the list the rules to remove in the parameter options. To remove all rules only specify the collabid

SYNTAX

beectl delete_voice_facility --group_collabid <group_collabid> [--include <phone rules>] [--exclude <phone rules>]
 

OPTIONS

--group_collabid

The collabid of the Group to have all of its rules deleted.

--include

The collection of inclusion phone number rules to remove from the given facility. The rules are delimited by pipes.

--exclude

The collection of exclusion phone number rules to remove from the given facility. The rules are delimited by pipes.

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_voice_facility --group_collabid grup=GroupName,enpr=MyEnterprise --include 1312???????|1713??????? --exclude 13129??????|17139??????

delete_xmpp_chat_rooms

This command is used to delete an xmpp chat room by name (if it exists, else it is a NOOP) specified by the --roomname option. Room-names are case insensitive. This command can also be used to delete those xmpp chat rooms which have not been accessed for a period of days specified by the --olderthan option.

SYNTAX

beectl delete_xmpp_chat_rooms [--olderthan|--roomname] <Number of days/Room Name> 
 

OPTIONS

--olderthan

Number of days/Room Name

--roomname

Number of days/Room Name

EXAMPLES

beectl delete_xmpp_chat_rooms --olderthan 60 OR beectl delete_xmpp_chat_rooms --roomname "Oracle Beehive Rocks"

download_device_logs

Downloads the logs for a device. This command can either download all log files for a device or all log files for a given application on the device or a particular log file.

SYNTAX

beectl download_device_logs --dest_dir <destination directory> {--device_log <identifier of the device log> | --device <identifier of the device> {--all|--application_name <name of the application> [--log_file_name <name of the log file>]}}
 

OPTIONS

--dest_dir

Specify the full path of the destination directory. The directory must already exist.

--device_log

Specify the identifier of the device log. Use list_device_logs command to determine the identifier of the device log.

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

--all

Specify this option to download all the log files for this device.

--application_name

Application Name

--log_file_name

Log File Name

EXAMPLES

beectl download_device_logs --dest_dir /tmp --device 1234:5678:devi:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --application_name MobileMail --log_file_name log.txt

download_generated_team_workspace_template

Generates a team workspace template from the given team workspace

SYNTAX

beectl download_generated_team_workspace_template --workspace <Workspace identifier> --file <Full path of the template file>
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Workspace identifier

--file

Full path of the input file

EXAMPLES

beectl download_generated_team_workspace_template --workspace wksp=test_team_ws,enpr=test_enterprise --file /tmp/template_attributes_and_selective_generation_options.xml

download_language_pack

Exports language pack resources managed by the Beehive deployment. The exact resources exported and the output destination details are controlled by command options.

SYNTAX

beectl download_language_pack [ --full ] [ --only_built_in ] [ --only_custom ] [ --include_class_files ] [ --destination_file <dest_file> ] [ --destination_directory <dest_dir> ] [ --base_name <base_name> ] [ --locale <locale> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--full

include everything; other options are silently ignored.

--only_built_in

include built-in xliff file versions.

--only_custom

include custom xliff file versions.

--include_class_files

include jar of internal classes used by runtime.

--destination_file

output destination file; directory extension should be provided, zip/jar recommended; the file must not exist.

--destination_directory

output destination directory; may exist; must not be used with --dest-file.

--base_name

include xliff with this base name; may be repeated; if omitted all base names are implicitly included.

--locale

include this locale for all base names; if omitted all locales are implicitly included.

EXAMPLES

beectl download_language_pack --full --destination_directory "/tmp" --base_name "oracle.beehive.core.util" --locale "en_us"

download_ldap_group_data

The download_ldap_group_data command downloads groups information for an external directory into an XML file. The generated XML file can be used with add_group command to create the groups.

SYNTAX

beectl download_ldap_group_data --file <filename> --profile <profile-name>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Name of the file to be created with group information in xml format.

--profile

Name of the directory profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl download_ldap_group_data --file Groups.xml --profile MyDirectoryProfile

download_ldap_user_data

The download_ldap_user_data command downloads user information for an external directory into an XML file. The generated XML file can be used with add_users command to create the users.

SYNTAX

beectl download_ldap_user_data --file <filename> --profile <profile-name>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Name of the file to be created with user information in xml format.

--profile

Name of the directory profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl download_ldap_user_data --file Users.xml --profile MyDirectoryProfile

download_syncml_messages

Downloads SyncML messages.

SYNTAX

beectl download_syncml_messages --directory <directory> --date <yyyy-MM-DD> [ --id <id> | --user_id <user_id>]
 

OPTIONS

--directory

Specify the full path of the output destination directory. The directory must exist within the same server environment used by the Management Service.

--date

Specify the date of data to download. Use the YYYY-MM-DD format.

--id

Specify the server side synchronization session ID of data to download.

--user_id

Specify the server side synchronization session ID of data to download.

EXAMPLES

beectl download_syncml_messages --directory /syncml_messages --date 2006-10-12 --id 105

download_syncml_sessions

Downloads SyncML messages.

SYNTAX

beectl download_syncml_sessions --file <file> --date <yyyy-MM-DD> [ --id <id> | --user_id <user_id>]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify output destination file. The file will be created within the same server environment used by the Management Service.

--date

Specify the date of data to download. Use the YYYY-MM-DD format.

--id

Specify the server side synchronization session ID of data to download.

--user_id

Specify the server side synchronization session ID of data to download.

EXAMPLES

beectl download_syncml_sessions --file /syncml_sessions.log --date 2006-10-12 --id 105

download_workspace_template_schema

Downloads workspace template XML schema to a file

SYNTAX

beectl download_workspace_template_schema [--file <Full path of the output file>]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Full path of the output file

EXAMPLES

beectl download_workspace_template_schema --file /tmp/schema.xsd

export_audit_trail

Exports an existing audit trail by the given identifier

SYNTAX

beectl export_audit_trail --trail <Audit trail identifier> --file <Full path of the output file>
 

OPTIONS

--trail

Audit trail identifier

--file

Full path name of the export file

EXAMPLES

beectl export_audit_trail --trail autr=MyAuditTrail --file /tmp/trail.xml

export_client_application_configuration

Exports a client application configuration to a local file.

SYNTAX

beectl export_client_application_configuration --configuration <client application configuration identifier> --file <destination file>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

Specify the identifier of the client application configuration.

--file

Specify the full path and file name. Oracle recommends using a .xml extension. If the file already exists, it will be overwritten.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_client_application_configuration --configuration 1234:5678:capc:1234567890123456789012 --file /tmp/client-app-config.xml

export_configuration_data

Exports configuration data for given configuration version.

SYNTAX

beectl export_configuration_data --file <output dir> [--configuration_version <required version>] [--verbose] [--no_null_values] [--no_large_values] [--no_binary_values] [--validate_output] [--only_custom_values]
 

OPTIONS

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

--file

Xml output file in which data will be dumped.

--verbose

If specified, all metadata information about the property will be printed.

--no_null_values

If specified, null or empty values will not be printed.

--no_large_values

If specified, large string data will not be printed.

--no_binary_values

If specified, binary data will not be printed.

--only_custom_values

If specified, properties which do not have same value as their initial/default values,will be printed.

--validate_output

Validates the generated output file.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_configuration_data --verbose --no_large_values --no_binary_values --no_null_values --validate_output

It transforms the generated xml into html output file avaialable at the same location as of the xml.

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

export_email_data

Export all email data to a file

SYNTAX

beectl export_email_data --user_name <user name> --file <file name>
 

OPTIONS

--user_name

The authentication ID of the user to be exported/imported.

--file

The file name of the file that holds the exported email data.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_email_data --user_name user1 --file user1.dat

export_errorcodes

Search for occurrences of error codes

SYNTAX

beectl export_errorcodes [--start <DATE_TIME>] [--end <DATE_TIME>] [--errorcode <STRING> ... |--exclude_errorcode <STRING> ... ] [--severity <string>] [--text <string>] [--max_results <INTEGER>] [--display_exception_stack] [--attribute <key>:<value> ... ] [--display_columns <STRING_LIST>] [--from_logs]    beectl export_errorcodes --get_count_service_by_ec <STRING>   beectl export_errorcodes --get_count_ec_by_service <STRING>
 

OPTIONS

--start

Start of time range

--end

End time range

--errorcode

Specific error codes to query for

--exclude_errorcode

Specific error codes to not search for

--severity

Minimum severity to restrict to

--text

Text in Exception stack or metadata parameters to search for

--max_results

Maximum number of results to return

--display_exception_stack

Should the Exception stack be printed

--display_columns

Comma separated list of columns to be displayed. Valid values are [service, messageid, displayname, severity, cause, effect, action, timestamp, exception_stack, ecid, service_inst_id, ctx_map]

--ecid

Execution Context ID

--service_inst_id

System object identifier or alias of either Service Instance or Oc4j.

--get_count_service_by_ec

Service instance ID to get error code counts from, or all to aggregate over all service instances.

--get_count_ec_by_service

Error code to get counts from, or all to aggregate over all error codes.

--from_logs

Query the logs instead of the database.

--attrib

Search for one of the following attributes: bee_compid, bee_compname, bee_vthreadid, bee_principalid, bee_logonrecid.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_errorcodes --start 2007-10-10T06:00:00 --end 2007-10-10T08:00:00 --errorcode BEEU-10364

Search for all instances of BEEU-10364 between 6AM and 8AM on October 10, 2007.

beectl export_errorcodes --start 2007-10-10T06:00:00 --severity WARNING --text 'QuotaException' --exclude_errorcode BEES-37968

Search for all all error codes reported since 6AM on October 10, 2007

with severity at least warning and 'QuotaException' in any parameters passed to the error codes except for BEES-37968.

beectl export_errorcodes --errorcode BEES-38216 --display_columns timestamp,cause,action,exception_stack

Search for all instances of error code BEES-38216, and display the timestamp, cause, action, and exception stack.

beectl export_errorcodes --get_count_service_by_ec b94885f7-2876-4d95-90aa-76a060875ac6

Get counts of error code occurrences in service instance b94885f7-2876-4d95-90aa-76a060875ac6, by error code.

beectl export_errorcodes --get_count_ec_by_service BEEU-00822

Get counts of error code occurrences of type BEEU-00822, by service.

export_filesystem_logs

Search log files stored on host machines.

SYNTAX

beectl export_filesystem_logs --search_string <string> [--maximum_results <int>] [--file_name_filter <string>] [--host_name_filter <string>] [--beehive_home_filter <string>] [--output_target <string>] [--output_format <string>] [--display_source <true|false>] [--display_original_copy <true|false>] [--columns <string_list>] [--log_analysis <true|false>] [--report_time_range <string>] [--report_message_type <string>] [--analysis_field <string_list>] [--get_latest <true|false>] [--local_search <true|false>] [--log_root <string>] [--order_by <string>] [--sort <string>] [--search_string_file_name <string>] [--display_ignored_summary_only <true|false>]
 

OPTIONS

--search_string

A search string is composed of a single or a combination of search conditions. A search condition has a field name (e.g. user_id='janedoe'), an operation type (e.g. op='contains') and condition oprands (!, &&, ||). The brackets "()" are used to group search conditions together. Valid search field names are: <ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | MSG_LEVEL | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | THREAD_ID | USER_ID | SUPPL_ATTRS | SUPPL_ATTR.NAME | SUPPL_ATTR.VALUE | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_SEQ | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_SEQ | MSG_TEXT | MSG_ARGS | NAME | VALUE | DETAIL_PATH | SUPPL_DETAIL | TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | PROB_KEY | BEE_COMPID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID | ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID | LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID>. Valid operation types are: <EQUALS | CONTAINS | STARTS_WITH | EQUALS_IGNORE_CASE | CONTAINS_IGNORE_CASE | STARTS_WITH_IGNORE_CASE | MATCHES | MATCHES_IGNORE_CASE>. Note: The search string must be enclosed in a pair of double-quotes and \ must be used to escape ! operand. Time stamp query condition can contain two values separated by a comma. Query fields ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID and LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID are special cases. Field ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID works with four operation types: <equals | contains | beginsWith | endsWith> and the search operation is always case-insensitive. But the operation type is not applicable to field LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID and any operation type specified for it will be ignored. Those fields are used to match corresponding BEE_PRINCIPAL_ID. Then the matched BEE_PRINCIPAL_ID will be used for the subsequent search with operation type <EQUALS_IGNORE_CASE> only.

--maximum_results

Maximum number of returned records. It tops out at 1,000, if the output_target is screen, otherwise there is no limit.

--file_name_filter

A file name filter is used to speed up searches. Use a comma to separate multiple values and a prefix # to specify excluding. Note: the prefix # is applied to all the values following it.

--host_name_filter

A host name filter is used to speed up searches. Use a comma to separate multiple values and a prefix # to specify excluding. Note: the prefix # is applied to all the values following it.

--beehive_home_filter

A beehive home filter is used to speed up searches. Use a comma to separate multiple values and a prefix # to specify excluding. Note: the prefix # is applied to all the values following it.

--output_target

Specify if direct the output to the screen or to a file.

--output_format

Specify output format. Supported formats are ODL-Text and XML.

--display_source

Default to false. Specify if display the name of the log file source for the returned record.

--display_original_copy

Default to false. Specify if display the original copy for the returned record.

--columns

Default is to display all the log record fields. Restrict to display only specified fields. Valid field names are: <ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | THREAD_ID | USER_ID | SUPPL_ATTRS | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | MSG_TEXT | MSG_ARGS | DETAIL_PATH | SUPPL_DETAIL | TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | PROB_KEY | BEE_COMPID | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID>. Note: field TSTZ_ORIGINATING will always be displayed.

--log_analysis

Default to false. Specify if choose to do the log analysis.

--report_time_range

Specify the desired time range for log analysis report. Only apply when option log_analysis is true.

--report_message_type

Specify the desired message type of the unique message count for log analysis report. Only apply when option log_analysis is true.

--analysis_field

Specify the desired unique count analysis field. Valid field names are: <ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_GROUP | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | THREAD_ID | USER_ID | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | MSG_TEXT | DETAIL_PATH | SUPPL_DETAIL | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | PROB_KEY | BEE_COMPID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID>

--get_latest

Default to false. Specify if choose to get the latest log record.

--order_by

Valid order-by column names are: <TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | USER_ID | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | THREAD_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_TEXT | BEE_COMPID | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID>.

--sort

The query result set can be sorted in ascending or descending order.

--local_search

Default to false. Specify if choose to search log files on the local machine only. Only work when the log_root option is also specified.

--log_root

Specify the log file root for local_search option.

--search_string_file_name

Specify the search string file name, a convenient way to enter multiple search strings. The format is one string per line. Valid only when the log_analysis option is true.

--display_ignored_summary_only

_PRINCIPAL_ID and LOGIN_IDif choose to display ignored summary only. Valid only when the log_analysis option is true.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_filesystem_logs --search_string "((user_id='janedoe'||user_id='johndoe')&&\!component_id='j2ee')&&(msg_text='esb_console' op='contains')"

beectl export_filesystem_logs --search_string "(TSTZ_ORIGINATING='2007-05-31T17:06:45.620-07:00,2007-05-31T17:08:15.639-07:00')"

beectl export_filesystem_logs --search_string "(TSTZ_ORIGINATING='2007-05-31T17:06:45.620-07:00')" --maximum_results 10

beectl export_filesystem_logs --search_string "(user_id='janedoe'&&module_id='security.oc4j')" --file_name_filter beeapp/log.txt,beemgmt --host_name_filter #some-host-name,some-other-host-name --beehive_home_filter /root/dir/product/1.0.6.1.0/beehive_119 --output_target /tmp/temp.log --output_format xml --maximum_results 16

beectl export_filesystem_logs --log_analysis --report_time_range 2880 --local_search --log_root log_root/some_log_directory

export_icalendar

Export invitations and assignments from a calendar and/or tasklist to an iCalendar file.

SYNTAX

beectl export_icalendar --file <file> [--overwrite] [--charset <charset>] { --do_as <unique_identifier> | --do_as_address <uri> | --do_as_authuser <authuser> } [{ --calendar <unique_identifier> | --nocalendar }] [{ --tasklist <unique_identifier> | --notasklist }] [--filter_uid <icalendar_uid>] [--filter_organizer <uri>] [--filter_timerange_start <date-time>] [--filter_timerange_end <date-time>] [--removeicalname <canonical_ical_name>]  [--authuser <authuser> --authpassword <password>] [--obfuscated]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and name of the iCalendar file to export.

--overwrite

Specify this option to overwrite the iCalendar export file if it already exists.

--charset

Specify the charset that is to be used in the iCalendar file that is being exported (http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets).

--do_as

Specify the unique identifier of the user or resource performing the action.

--do_as_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifie (URI) of the user or resource performing the action.

--do_as_authuser

Specify the login name of the user performing the action.

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of the source calendar, the default calendar of the "do_as" entity will be used if nothing is specified.

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of the source tasklist, the default tasklist of the "do_as" entity will be used if nothing is specified.

--filter_uid

Specify a iCalendar UID. This will filter the export to include only invitations and assignments matching the iCalendar UID.

--filter_organizer

Specify an organizer URI. This will filter the export to include only invitations and assignments matching the organizer.

--filter_timerange_start

Specify a start date. This will filter the export to include only invitations and assignments after the specified date.

--filter_timerange_end

Specify an end date. This will filter the export to include only invitations and assignments before the specified date.

--nocalendar

Do not export from a calendar (VEVENT components will not be exported).

--notasklist

Do not export from a tasklist (VTODO components will not be exported).

--removeicalname

Remove canonical ical names such as VCALENDAR.VEVENT.VALARM, VCALENDAR.VEVENT.ORGANIZER.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_icalendar --file file.ics --do_as_address user@example.com --filter_timerange_start 2007-01-01T01:01:01Z --filter_timerange_end 2007-02-01T01:01:01Z

export_logs

With an option of refreshing the repository first, query the repository to get relevant log records from log files stored on host machines.

SYNTAX

beectl export_logs {{ --query_string <string> [ --refresh_repository <true> ]} | --refresh_repository <true> } [--order_by <string>] [--sort <string>] [--columns <string_list>] [--output_target <string>] [--output_format <string>] [--display_source <true|false>] [--maximum_results <int>]
 

OPTIONS

--query_string

Mandatory if option "refresh_repository" is not specified. A query string is composed of a single or a combination of query conditions. A query condition has a field name (e.g. user_id='janedoe'), an operation type (e.g. op='contains') and condition oprands (!, &&, ||). The brackets "()" are used to group query conditions together. Valid query field names are: <TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | MSG_LEVEL | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | USER_ID | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | THREAD_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_TEXT | BEE_COMPID | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID | ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID | LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID>. Valid operation types are: <EQUALS | CONTAINS | STARTS_WITH | EQUALS_IGNORE_CASE | CONTAINS_IGNORE_CASE | STARTS_WITH_IGNORE_CASE | MATCHES | MATCHES_IGNORE_CASE>Note: The query string must be enclosed in a pair of double-quotes and \ must be used to escape ! operand. Time stamp query condition can contain two values separated by a comma. Query fields ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_ PRINCIPAL_ID and LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID are special cases. Field ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID works with four operation types: <equals | contains | beginsWith | endsWith> and the search operation is always case-insensitive. But the operation type is not applicable to field LOGIN_ID_TO_PRINCIPAL_ID and any operation type specified for it will be ignored. Those fields are used to match corresponding BEE_PRINCIPAL_ID. Then the matched BEE_PRINCIPAL_ID will be used for the subsequent query with operation type <EQUALS> only.

--refresh_repository

Mandatory if option "query_string" is not specified. Force an upload of all the log files to refresh the repository.

--order_by

Valid order-by column names are: <TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | MSG_LEVEL | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | USER_ID | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | THREAD_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_TEXT | BEE_COMPID | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID>.

--sort

The query result set can be sorted in ascending or descending order.

--columns

Default is to display all the log record fields. Restrict to display only specified fields. Valid field names are: <ORG_ID | COMPONENT_ID | INSTANCE_ID | MSG_ID | HOSTING_CLIENT_ID | MSG_TYPE | MSG_GROUP | MODULE_ID | PROCESS_ID | THREAD_ID | USER_ID | SUPPL_ATTRS | UPSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | DOWNSTREAM_COMPONENT_ID | EXEC_CONTEXT_UNIQUE_ID | ERROR_UNIQUE_ID | MSG_TEXT | MSG_ARGS | DETAIL_PATH | SUPPL_DETAIL | TSTZ_ORIGINATING | TSTZ_NORMALIZED | HOST_ID | HOST_NWADDR | PROB_KEY | BEE_COMPID | BEE_PRINCIPALID | BEE_COMPNAME | BEE_LOGONRECID | BEE_VTHREADID>. Note: field TSTZ_ORIGINATING will always be displayed.

--output_target

Specify if direct the output to the screen or to a file.

--output_format

Specify output format. Supported formats are ODL-Text and XML.

--display_source

Default to false. Specify if display the name of the log file source for the returned record.

--maximum_results

Maximum number of returned records.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_logs --refresh_repository true

beectl export_logs --query_string "((user_id='janedoe'||user_id='johndoe')&&\!component_id='j2ee')&&(msg_text='esb_console' op='contains')"

beectl export_logs --query_string "(TSTZ_ORIGINATING='2007-05-31T17:06:45.620-07:00,2007-05-31T17:08:15.639-07:00')"

beectl export_logs --query_string "(TSTZ_ORIGINATING='2007-05-31T17:06:45.620-07:00')" --maximum_results 10

beectl export_logs --query_string "(user_id='janedoe'&&module_id='security.oc4j')" --order_by THREAD_ID --sort descending --columns MODULE_ID --columns USER_ID --columns USER_ID --columns MSG_TEXT --columns THREAD_ID --output_target /tmp/temp.log --output_format xml --display_source true --maximum_results 10

export_policy

Exports policy data into an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl export_policy --policy_name <name of the policy to export> --scope <identifier of the container where the policy is defined> --destination <destination directory where the XML file will be exported>
 

OPTIONS

--policy_name

Specify the name of the policy to export.

--scope

Specify the policy container identifier.

--destination

Specify the destination directory for the XML file.

EXAMPLES

beectl export_policy --policy_name MyPolicy --scope enpr=MyEnterprise --destination /private

export_probes

Lists all probe information in beehive.

SYNTAX

beectl export_probes
 

OPTIONS

--id

ID of a Probe to get detailed information about

--summary

Get Summary

--start

Start time to search for probes

--end

End time to search for probes

--service_instance

Service instance names to search for

--calling_class

Calling class

--threadID

Thread ID

--thread_rep

Thread Rep

--txn_ctx

Transaction Context

--user_ctx

User context

--arg_type

--arg_value

--msgid

--throwable_text

EXAMPLES

beectl export_probes

Lists all probe information in beehive.

export_workspace

Exports workspace contents into an external directory.

SYNTAX

beectl export_workspace --workspace <Workspace identifier> --output_dir <Output directory> [--log_file <The log file where the results will be printed. If none is specified, the log file will be located in the output directory, and will be called export-log-(timestamp). This option can be either the path to a logfile or the path to a directory. If the latter, the log file will be created under the directory with the default name export-log-(timestamp).>]
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Workspace identifier

--output_dir

Output directory

--log_file

The log file where the results will be printed. If none is specified, the log file will be located in the output directory, and will be called export-log-(timestamp). This option can be either the path to a logfile or the path to a directory. If the latter, the log file will be created under the directory with the default name export-log-(timestamp).

EXAMPLES

beectl export_workspace --workspace wksp=test_team_ws,orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --output_dir /scratch/export/wspc --log_file /tmp/export.log

import_coexistence_data

Import data from the coexisting remote system for a given user.

SYNTAX

beectl import_coexistence_data {--user <user_cen> | --email <user_email> } --data_type <type> [--data_type <type> ...] [--timerange_start <start>] [--relative_timerange_start <relative_start>] [--timerange_end <end>] [--relative_timerange_end <relative_end>] [--modified_since <modified_since>]   beectl import_coexistence_data --generate_refresh_import_commands --generated_file <file> [--system_affinity <system_name>]
 

OPTIONS

--user

Specify the identifier of the user.

--email

Specify the email address of the user.

--data_type

Type of data to import. Must be one of: MEETING, TASK.

--timerange_start

Start date time of import time range.

--relative_timerange_start

Start time of import time range specified by number of days relative to current time (eg. -30)

--timerange_end

End date time of import time range.

--relative_timerange_end

End time of import time range specified by number of days relative to current time (eg. 90)

--modified_since

Import only entries that have been modified since the specified date.

--generate_refresh_import_commands

Generate the import commands to import all newer entries of coexisting remote users using a [-14 days, INFINITY] date range. This is required after converting profiles to accessible_by beehive. The generated command file can be used with beectl --batchfile.

--generated_file

Specify the generated output file. This file is generated only when generate_refresh_import_commands option is selected and will hold the newly generated coexistence_data_import commands.

--system_affinity

Specify the name of the coexisting remote system.

EXAMPLES

beectl import_coexistence_data --user user=user_loginid --data_type TASK --data_type MEETING --relative_timerange_start=-90 --relative_timerange_end 90

beectl import_coexistence_data --email user@example.com --data_type MEETING --timerange_start 2007-10-01T12:00:00Z --timerange_end NOW

beectl import_coexistence_data --user user=user_loginid --data_type MEETING --timerange_start=-INFINITY --timerange_end INFINITY

beectl import_coexistence_data --generate_refresh_import_commands --generated_file outfile.beectl

import_documents

Imports documents into Beehive from files on the server without copying the file content. Data on the server files will be treated as read-only; should an imported document be edited in Beehive, a copy of the content will be made at that time.

SYNTAX

beectl import_documents --filesystem_reference <Identifier of the filesystem reference> --folder_path <Folder path> [ --name_filter <Name filter> ] [ --conflict_resolution_mode <ABORT, OVERWRITE, or CREATE_UNIQUE> ]
 

OPTIONS

--filesystem_reference

Identifier of the filesystem reference to import from.

--folder_path

Full path of the Beehive folder to import to. E.g. /MyEnterprise/MyOrganization/MyWorkspace/Documents/MyFolder would import to MyFolder.

--name_filter

(Optional) Filter to use for choosing which documents to import. Syntax is equivalent to SQL LIKE. E.g. 'file%' would import file1, file2.txt, but not my_file. If not specified, defaults to '%', which includes all documents.

--conflict_resolution_mode

(Optional) How to handle naming conflicts between existing Beehive documents and new documents being imported. ABORT will avoid creating the conflicting document, OVERWRITE will overwrite the conflicting document, and CREATE_UNIQUE will create a unique name for the imported document. If not specified, defaults to CREATE_UNIQUE.

EXAMPLES

beectl import_documents --filesystem_reference fsref=MyFilesystemReference,enpr=MyEnterprise --folder_path /MyEnterprise/MyOrganization/MyWorkspace/Documents/MyFolder --name_filter %.txt --conflict_resolution_mode CREATE_UNIQUE

import_email_data

Import email data from a file created by export command into a given folder

SYNTAX

beectl import_email_data --user_name <user name> --folder <folder name> --file <file name>
 

OPTIONS

--user_name

The authentication ID of the user to be exported/imported.

--folder

The relative folder path (from the workspace level) of the folder to hold all the imported data.

--file

The file name of the file that holds the exported email data.

EXAMPLES

beectl import_email_data --user_name user1 --folder Archive/backup1 --file user1.dat

import_icalendar

Import an iCalendar file to an existing calendar and/or tasklist. If an iCalendarObject has a UID that already exists in the destination calendar and/or tasklist it will be re-created. VCALENDAR components can have many VEVENT and VTODO sub-components with different UIDs but sub-components of the same UID must be consecutive. A VCALENDAR component imported with a METHOD:X-ORACLE-DELETE or METHOD:CANCEL will cause all sub-components to be deleted.

SYNTAX

beectl import_icalendar --file <file> [--charset <charset>] { --do_as <unique_identifier> | --do_as_address <uri> | --do_as_authuser <authuser> } [--continue_on_error] [{ --calendar <unique_identifier> | --nocalendar }] [{ --tasklist <unique_identifier> | --notasklist }] [--authuser <authuser> --authpassword <password>] [--obfuscated] [--holiday] [--migration [--reconciliation]] [--removeicalname <canonical_ical_name>]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and name of the iCalendar file to import.

--charset

Specify the charset that is used in the iCalendar file that is being imported (http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets).

--do_as

Specify the unique identifier of the user or resource performing the action.

--do_as_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifie (URI) of the user or resource performing the action.

--do_as_authuser

Specify the login name of the user performing the action.

--continue_on_error

Force the tool to continue the import even if some of the iCalendar objects fail to be imported.

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of the destination calendar, the default calendar of the "do_as" entity will be used if nothing is specified.

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of the destination tasklist, the default tasklist of the "do_as" entity will be used if nothing is specified.

--nocalendar

Do not import to a calendar (Discard VEVENT components).

--notasklist

Do not import to a tasklist (Discard VTODO components).

--holiday

All events imported in a team workspace will be imported as Holiday events.

--migration

Specify that all the iCalendar file will be imported in the context of a migration. The participation status of all users can be set by the importer and a limited number of beehive events will be raised.

--reconciliation

Specify that a reconciliation should be done for existing meetings attended by the user before he was created in the system, this option can only be used if --migration is used.

--removeicalname

Remove canonical ical names such as VCALENDAR.VEVENT.VALARM, VCALENDAR.VEVENT.ORGANIZER.

EXAMPLES

beectl import_icalendar --file file.ics --do_as_address user@example.com

import_timezones

Imports time zone definitions to the database.

SYNTAX

beectl import_timezones --file <absolute path of tzInfoPkg.xml>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Spcify the full path and file name of the time zone definition file (tzInfoPkg.xml).

EXAMPLES

beectl import_timezones --file $ORACLE_HOME/beehive/seed/tm/tzInfoPkg.xml

import_workspace

Imports contents of an external directory into a new team workspace.

SYNTAX

beectl import_workspace --input_dir <Input directory> --scope <The scope under which the workspace will be created.> [--log_file <The log file where the results will be printed. If none is specified, the log file will be located in the input directory, and will be called import-log-(timestamp). This option can be either the path to a logfile or the path to a directory. If the latter, the log file will be created under the directory with the default name import-log-(timestamp).>] [--auto_name_resolution <Automatic workspace name conflict resolution.>] [--keep_original_owner <Whether to keep the workspace's original owner.>] [--import_members <Whether to import members.>] [--add_connected_user <Whether to add the connected user to the new workspace.>] [--new_owner <New owner>]
 

OPTIONS

--input_dir

Input directory

--scope

The scope under which the workspace will be created.

--log_file

The log file where the results will be printed. If none is specified, the log file will be located in the input directory, and will be called import-log-(timestamp). This option can be either the path to a logfile or the path to a directory. If the latter, the log file will be created under the directory with the default name import-log-(timestamp).

--auto_name_resolution

Automatic workspace name conflict resolution.

--keep_original_owner

Whether to keep the workspace's original owner.

--import_members

Whether to import members.

--add_connected_user

Whether to add the connected user to the new workspace.

--new_owner

New owner

EXAMPLES

beectl import_workspace --input_dir /scratch/import/wspc --scope orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --log_file /tmp/import.log --auto_name_resolution false --keep_original_owner false --import_members false --add_connected_user true --new_owner user=beeadmin

list_access_control_fields

Lists the AccessControlFields of an entity.

SYNTAX

beectl list_access_control_fields --entity <unique identifier of the entity>
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity for which the AccessControlFields should be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_access_control_fields --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_access_types

Lists available access type names and identifiers.

SYNTAX

beectl list_access_types
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_access_types

list_applied_workspace_templates

Lists the workspace templates that have been applied to this workspace. For each applied template it indicates whether this workspace is a template evolution target.

SYNTAX

beectl list_applied_workspace_templates --workspace <Workspace identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Workspace identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl list_applied_workspace_templates --workspace wksp=test_team_ws,enpr=test_enterprise

list_assigned_roles

Lists AssignedRole entities.

SYNTAX

beectl list_assigned_roles [--scope <unique identifier of the Scope>] [--name <like string>] [--role_definition <like string>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Specify the unique identifier of the Scope of the AssignedRoles to be listed. If not specified the Scope will be the Enterprise.

--name

Specify the name pattern for the AssignedRoles to be listed. If not specified all accessible AssignedRoles will be returned.

--role_definition

Specify the name pattern for the RoleDefinitions of the AssignedRoles to be listed. If not specified any corresponding RoleDefinition is allowed for the returned AssignedRoles.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_assigned_roles --scope wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyAssignedRole

list_attendant_aaml

Prints the Auto Attendant Markup Language for an auto attendant.

SYNTAX

beectl list_attendant_aaml --name <attendant name>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the attendant to be displayed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_attendant_aaml --name myAttendant

list_attendant_prompts

Lists all prompts that have been uploaded for an attendant.

SYNTAX

beectl list_attendant_prompts --name <attendant name>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the attendant for which to display prompts.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_attendant_prompts --name my_attendant

list_attendants

Lists all attendants in the system.

SYNTAX

beectl list_attendants
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_attendants

list_audit_policies

Lists audit policies and prints policy information

SYNTAX

beectl list_audit_policies [--name <Name of the audit policy>] [--policy <Audit policy identifier>] [--detail]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the audit policy

--policy

Audit policy identifier

--detail

Detail toggle

EXAMPLES

beectl list_audit_policies --name MyPolicy

beectl list_audit_policies --name MyPolicy --detail

beectl list_audit_policies --policy MyPolicy

beectl list_audit_policies --policy plcy=MyPolicy --detail

list_audit_trails

Lists audit trails and prints trail information

SYNTAX

beectl list_audit_trails [--name <Name of the audit trail>] [--4} <Name of the audit trail>]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the audit trail

--trail

Audit trail identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl list_audit_trails --name MyAuditTrail

beectl list_audit_trails --trail audt=MyAuditTrail

list_bootstrap_configuration

Displays bootstrap configuration for local midtier.

SYNTAX

beectl list_bootstrap_configuration
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_bootstrap_configuration

list_calendar_enrollments

List the directly enrolled and directly unenrolled members of the specified team workspace calendar.

SYNTAX

beectl list_calendar_enrollments { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> }
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a team workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_calendar_enrollments --select_by_address teamworkspace@example.com

list_calendar_permissions

List the access control permissions of a user, resource or workspace's calendar. When multiple calendars match the selection criteria for the user, resource or workspace, the default calendar will be used.

SYNTAX

beectl list_calendar_permissions { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> }
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_calendar_permissions --select_by_address user@example.com

list_calendars

Lists the existing calendars of a user, resource or workspace.

SYNTAX

beectl list_calendars { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } [ --show <DEFAULT | ALL | MORE>]
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--show

Lists some or all of the attributes of the calendar. Valid values are DEFAULT, ALL or MORE. If nothing (or DEFAULT) is specified the default important attributes are listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_calendars --select_by_address user@example.com

list_categories

Lists the categories in the enterprise.If the recurse option is used then sub-categories are also listed.

SYNTAX

beectl list_categories --recurse <Y/N> --parent_category <Identifier of the parent category> --output_format <XML>
 

OPTIONS

--recurse

Control the categories that are returned. Use the Y argument with this option to return all categories in an enterprise. Use the N argument with this option to return only root level categories.

--parent_category

Unique Identifier for Parent Category.

--output_format

If 'XML' the output is sent as xml to standard out else its printed as table on standard output.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_categories --recurse Y --parent_category catg=Resource_US,catg=Resource_ROOT,enpr=bee_ent

beectl list_categories --recurse Y --parent_category catg=Resource_US,catg=Resource_ROOT,enpr=bee_ent --output_format XML

list_category

Prints information about a category given a category identifier

SYNTAX

beectl list_category --category <Identifier of the category to be listed>
 

OPTIONS

--category

Specify the identifier of the category.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_category --category catg=Resource_US,catg=Resource_ROOT,enpr=bee_ent

list_category_applications

List all the categories (and associated attributes) applied to a specific entity. Lists the application of a specific category to the entity if the [category] parameter is provided.

SYNTAX

beectl list_category_applications --entity <entity id> --category <category id>
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Identifier of the entity for which applied categories should be listed.

--category

Identifier of a specific category whose application should be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_category_applications --entity wksp=Example_Team_Workspace,enpr=Oracle

beectl list_category_applications --entity wksp=Example_Team_Workspace,enpr=Oracle --category catg=TechnicalDocuments,enpr=Oracle

list_category_configuration

Lists the category configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

SYNTAX

beectl list_category_configuration --container <Configuration scope or heterogenous folder> 
 

OPTIONS

--container

Scope or heterogenous folder on which the category configuration should be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_category_configuration --container orgn=MyOrganization,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_client_application_configuration

Lists the client application configurations.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_application_configuration {--configuration <client application configuration identifier >|--community <community identifier>}
 

OPTIONS

--community

Specify the identifier of the community.

--configuration

Specify the identifier of the client application configuration.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_application_configuration --configuration 1234:5678:capc:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

beectl list_client_application_configuration --community orgn=myOrg,enpr=myEnterprise

list_client_application_modules

Lists the modules for a given client application patchset.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_application_modules --patchset <identifier of the client application patchset>
 

OPTIONS

--patchset

Specify the identifier of the client application patchset. {--select_users_without_profile|-ion_patchsets command to determine the identifier of a client application patchset.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_application_modules --patchset 1234:5678:capp:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

list_client_application_patchsets

Lists the patchsets for a given client application version.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_application_patchsets --application_version <identifier of the client application version>
 

OPTIONS

--application_version

Specify the identifier of the client application version. Use list_client_application_versions command to determine the identifier of a client application version.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_application_patchsets --application_version 1234:5678:capv:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

list_client_application_versions

Lists all the versions for a given client application.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_application_versions --application <identifier of the client application>
 

OPTIONS

--application

Specify the identifier of the client application. Use list_client_applications command to determine the identifier of the client application.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_application_versions --application 1234:5678:capn:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434

list_client_applications

Lists all the client applications.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_applications
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_applications

list_client_applications_usage

Lists the client applications usage report. The command displays the number of devices that have installed a client application.

SYNTAX

beectl list_client_applications_usage
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_client_applications_usage

list_clone_properties

Lists the set of system model properties required for ias cloning scripts.

SYNTAX

beectl list_clone_properties 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_clone_properties

list_coexistence_connectors

Lists all coexistence connectors for a coexisting remote system.

SYNTAX

beectl list_coexistence_connectors
 

OPTIONS

--show

Show extra connector details.

--name

Specify the name of the coexisting remote system.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_coexistence_connectors

list_coexistence_profiles

Lists the profile of coexisting users.

SYNTAX

beectl list_coexistence_profiles [{--user <user_identifier>|--email <user_email>      <example_message>beectl list-select_users_with_profile} --file <file_name> }] [--show] [--sort]
 

OPTIONS

--user

Specify the identifier of the user.

--email

Specify the email address of the user.

--select_users_without_profile

List users without a coexistence profile in a XML document.

--select_users_with_profile

List users with a coexistence profile in a XML document.

--file

Specify the name of the file in which the list should be outputed.

--show

Specify the details level. Supported values: MORE, ALL.

--sort

List coexiting users ordered by their name.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_coexistence_profiles

beectl list_coexistence_profiles --select_users_without_profile --file users.xml

beectl list_coexistence_profiles --user user=user_loginid --show ALL

list_coexistence_status

Reports the status of the coexisting containers and coexistence profiles.

SYNTAX

beectl list_coexistence_status [--calendar] [--tasklist] [--addressbook] [--message_inbox] [--profile]
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Lists calendar coexistence status.

--tasklist

Lists task list coexistence status.

--addressbook

Lists address book coexistence status.

--message_inbox

Lists message inbox coexistence status.

--profile

Lists coexistence profile registration status.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_coexistence_status

beectl list_coexistence_status --profile

beectl list_coexistence_status --calendar

list_coexistence_systems

Lists all coexisting remote systems.

SYNTAX

beectl list_coexistence_systems
 

OPTIONS

EXAMPLES

beectl list_coexistence_systems

list_command_metadata

Lists all the metadata about given command.

SYNTAX

beectl list_command_metadata --command_name <command name>
 

OPTIONS

--command_name

Command name.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_command_metadata --command_name list_command_metadata

list_commands

Lists the command names based on the given criteria.

It also lists all the available categories and actions for easy access. If the command is executed with various options then the result would be command names qualifying for ALL specified criteria rather than ONE OR MORE of the criteria.

SYNTAX

beectl list_commands (--display_actions | --display_categories | ( [--action <action name>] [--category <category name> ] [--name <substring of desired command list> ] [--advanced] [--all_visibilities])
 

OPTIONS

--display_actions

Displays all available actions.

--display_categories

Displays all available categories.

--action

Search will be based on given action.

--category

Search will be based on given category. This option can be supplied multiple times.

--name

Command name substring, a regular expression using * or ? can be used as option value. Blank search using * or ? meta characters only is not supported. Though these characters can be used at the end of the pattern. For example, list* is a valid pattern, but *list is not.

--advanced

Lists advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities

Lists general and advanced visibility data.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_commands --display_actions

ectl-output_commands --display_categories

beectl list_commands --advanced

beectl list_commands --category "users" --category "coexistence" --action LIST

Above example will return all command names having general visibility, categories users, coexistence and action LIST.

beectl list_commands --category "users" --name oc4j

Above example will list all the commands which have "oc4j" in their name.

Specifying Visibility Options: Any of the following options can be used for specific visibility data.

--advanced can be passed to include advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities can be passed to include general and advanced visibility data.

list_components

Lists components in the configuration repository.

If no option is specified, then all the components in the configuration repository will be listed.

When --type <type name> is specified all the components of that type are listed.

When --use_local_home flag is specified, only managed system components from the current ORACLE HOME is returned.

All the property values are assumed to be strings and with that assumption search is performed.

SYNTAX

beectl list_components (--display_types |[--type <type name>)] [--use_local_home] [--configuration_version <required version>])
 

OPTIONS

--display_types

Displays all the valid component types.

--type

Lists all components of given type.

--use_local_home

Searches only in the current ORACLE HOME.

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

--advanced

Lists advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities

Lists general and advanced visibility data.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_components

beectl list_components --type ServiceInstance

Lists all the components of type ServiceInstance.

beectl list_components --display_types

Above example lists all valid component type names.

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

Specifying Visibility Options: Any of the following options can be used for specific visibility data.

--advanced can be passed to include advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities can be passed to include general and advanced visibility data.

list_conference_templates

Lists conference-template artifacts under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl list_conference_templates --parent <Workspace identifier> --count-limit <A count limit for a list of conference templates>
 

OPTIONS

--parent

Workspace identifier

--count-limit

A count limit for a list of conference templates

EXAMPLES

beectl list_conference_templates --parent wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_conferences

Lists conference artifacts under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl list_conferences --parent <Workspace identifier> --count-limit <A count limit for a list of conferences>
 

OPTIONS

--parent

Workspace identifier

--count-limit

A count limit for a list of conferences

EXAMPLES

beectl list_conferences --parent wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_configuration_versions

Lists all available configuration versions and activation time information

SYNTAX

beectl list_configuration_versions [--configuration_version <required version>]
 

OPTIONS

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_configuration_versions

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

list_connection_pools

Lists available connection pools in the system.

SYNTAX

beectl list_connection_pools [--configuration_version <required version>]
 

OPTIONS

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_connection_pools

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

list_custom_user_properties

The list_custom_user_properties command lists all custom properties of users.

SYNTAX

beectl list_custom_user_properties 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_custom_user_properties

list_deleted_organizations

Lists deleted organizations

SYNTAX

beectl list_deleted_organizations
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_deleted_organizations

list_deleted_workspaces

Lists deleted workspaces

SYNTAX

beectl list_deleted_workspaces
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_deleted_workspaces

list_deployment_templates

Lists the available deployment templates in central configuration repository

SYNTAX

beectl list_deployment_templates [ --component <component id> ] [--configuration_version <required version>] [--advanced] [--all_visibilities]
 

OPTIONS

--component

Alias or identifier of deployment template configuration object.

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

--advanced

Lists advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities

Lists general and advanced visibility data.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_deployment_templates

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

Specifying Visibility Options: Any of the following options can be used for specific visibility data.

--advanced can be passed to include advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities can be passed to include general and advanced visibility data.

list_device_commands

Lists the device commands for a given device. The list can be further filtered by specifying the status of the device command.

SYNTAX

beectl list_device_commands --device <identifier of the device> [--status <device command status>]
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

--status

Specify the status of the device command. The following are the valid command statuses: PENDING SUCCESS ERROR WARNING

EXAMPLES

beectl list_device_commands --device 1234:5678:devi:1234567890123456789012 --status PENDING

list_device_logs

Lists the device logs for a given device.

SYNTAX

beectl list_device_logs --device <identifier of the device>
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_device_logs --device 1234:5678:devi:1234567890123456789012

list_device_profiles

Lists all the device profiles.

SYNTAX

beectl list_device_profiles
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_device_profiles

list_device_types

Lists all the device types.

SYNTAX

beectl list_device_types
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_device_types

list_devices

Lists the devices either belonging to a user or with the specified device status.

SYNTAX

beectl list_devices {--user <identifier of the user>|--status <device status>} [--count_limit <count limit>]
 

OPTIONS

--user

Specify the identifier of the user owning the device. Use list_users command to determine the identifier of a user.

--status

Specify the status of the device. The following are the valid device statuses: ACTIVE PROVISIONED BLACKLISTED LOCKDOWN .

--count_limit

Specify the maximum number of rows to be returned.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_devices --user user=john.doe

beectl list_devices --status BLACKLISTED

list_directory_profiles

The list_directory_profiles command lists directory profiles in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl list_directory_profiles --file <filename> 
 

OPTIONS

--file

XML file to be created.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_directory_profiles --file MyDirectoryProfile.xml

list_email_messages

List the email messages in a transport queue

SYNTAX

beectl list_email_messages --queue_id <queue_id> --max_count <max_count>
 

OPTIONS

--queue_id

The email transport queue id

--max_count

The maximum count of rows to be displayed

EXAMPLES

beectl list_email_messages --queue_id 1234 --max_count 100

list_email_queues

List the email transport queues information

SYNTAX

beectl list_email_queues
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_email_queues

list_enterprises

Lists all enterprises and prints names and identifiers

SYNTAX

beectl list_enterprises
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_enterprises

list_errorcode_catalog

List all error code definitions in beehive.

SYNTAX

beectl list_errorcode_catalog [--display_columns <STRING_LIST>] [--errorcode_range <xxxxx-yyyyy>] [--errorcode <BEEX-12345> ... ] 
 

OPTIONS

--display_columns

Comma separated list of columns to be displayed. Valid arguments are [service, messageid, displayname, severity, cause, effect, action]

--errorcode_range

Dash-separated range of error codes to list from the catalog, without the prefix. Default: 00000-99999

--errorcode

An individual error code to display information about, including prefix.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_errorcode_catalog

Lists all error code definitions in beehive.

beectl list_errorcode_catalog --display_columns messageid,displayname,cause --errorcode_range 00400-00499

Lists the messageid, display name, and cause of all errorcodes between 00400 and 00499

beectl list_errorcode_catalog --errorcode 'BEEU-00822'

Lists all catalog information on the error BEEU-00822

list_event_groups

Lists all business object events.

SYNTAX

beectl list_event_groups [ --name <name of event group to be listed> ]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Specify the name of the event to be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_event_groups --name MyEventGroup

list_events

Lists all business object events.

SYNTAX

beectl list_events [ --internal_name <event name to be listed> ]
 

OPTIONS

--internal_name

Specify the name of the event to be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_events --internal_name MyEvent

list_expertise_background_jobs

Displays the status of all expertise background jobs.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_background_jobs    {       [ --job <job>]       [--detail]    }
 

OPTIONS

--job

Job type of the expertise background job. Allowed values are CONFIDENCE_UPDATER, PROFILING_HANDLER, PROFILE_OPTIMIZER, PROFILE_TRANSFER, RELATIONSHIP_HANDLER and WHOIS_HANDLER.

--detail

A detailed view of all the specified jobs is shown.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_background_jobs --job PROFILE_TRANSFER

beectl list_expertise_background_jobs --job CONFIDENCE_UPDATER --detail true

beectl list_expertise_background_jobs --detail true

list_expertise_profiling_configuration

The list_expertise_profiling_configuration command lists the profiling configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_profiling_configuration 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_profiling_configuration

list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities

The list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities command lists all the entities for whom expertise profiling is enabled.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_profiling_enabled_entities

list_expertise_profiling_status

The list_expertise_profiling_status command lists the expertise profiling status of the user specified. The profiling status information comprises Enability, Bootstrap, Searchability statuses.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_profiling_status --entity <identifier> 
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Identifier of the entity whose expertise profiling status is to be determined. Permitted value is a valid collab id or BODN id of the entity. This option is mandatory.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_profiling_status --entity 3F5B:23D3:user:40EA125BD4941FBEE040578CA8027E89000000030E6F

beectl list_expertise_profiling_status --entity user=user1,enpr=oracle

list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails

The list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails command lists all the email addresses that have been blacklisted for expertise relationship profiling.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_relationship_blacklist_emails

list_expertise_stop_phrases

Lists the stop phrases for expertise service.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_stop_phrases    {        --enterprise <enterprise identifier>        --output_format <output_format>    }
 

OPTIONS

--enterprise

Identifier of the enterprise for which the stop phrases will be added.

--output_format

The output format for stop phrases. Only XML format is supported.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_stop_phrases --enterprise enpr=Example

beectl list_expertise_stop_phrases --enterprise enpr=Example --output_format XML

list_expertise_user_scopes

The list_expertise_user_scopes command lists all expertise user scope or detailed version of supplied expertise user scope CollabId/BODN with --expertise_user_scope option.

SYNTAX

beectl list_expertise_user_scopes [--output_format <XML>] [--expertise_user_scope <BODN or CollabId>]
 

OPTIONS

--output_format

Output format

--expertise_user_scope

CollabId or BODN format of the expertise user scope to be detailed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_expertise_user_scopes --output_format XML

beectl list_expertise_user_scopes --expertise_user_scope exus=ExpertiseUserScopeName,enpr=Oracle

beectl list_expertise_user_scopes --expertise_user_scope 416E:25BF:exus:6A9CBED7822AA32EE040578C5C8453AB000000018705

list_external_contacts

The list_external_contacts command lists contacts that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all contacts are listed. It also lists the details of the contact(s) whose identifier is specified.

SYNTAX

beectl list_external_contacts    {        --count <true|false>      |        --contact <identifier of external contact >        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)> ]       |        --email_id <Email address of the user>       [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)>  ]      |        [ --family_name <family name of the contact> ... ]       [ --given_name <given name of the contact> ... ]        [ --display_name <display name of the contact> ... ]       [ --middle_name <middle name of the contact> ... ]        [ --job_title <job title of the contact> ... ]       [ --prefix <prefix of the contact> ... ]        [ --suffix <suffix of the contact> ... ]        [ --nick_name <nick name of the contact> ... ]        [ --office_location <office location of the contact> ... ]        [ --company <company of the contact> ... ]        [ --profession <profession of the contact> ... ]        [ --department <department of the contact> ... ]        [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]        [ --property <name(assistant|certificate|notes)=value=description> ... ]        [ --address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]        [ --status <status of user(enabled|disabled|locked|marked_for_delete)> ... ]        [ --is_deleted <true|false>  ]        [ --created_by <identifier of creator> ... ]        [ --modified_by <identifier of modifier> ... ]        [ --match <match attributes(ANY|ALL)> ]        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)> ]     }
 

OPTIONS

--contact

The identifier of the external contact

--email_id

Email id of the external contact

--family_name

Family name of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--given_name

Given name of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--display_name

Display name of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--middle_name

Middle name of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--job_title

Job title of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--prefix

Prefix of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--suffix

Suffix of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--nick_name

ta_type="STRING">Feed type of the feed configuration. Permitted vaed. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--office_location

Office location of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--company

Company of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--profession

Profession of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--department

Department of the contact. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the contact belongs to.

--property

Details of the property in the format name=value. Supported names are certificate, assistant and notes. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value.

--address

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--status

Sets the provisioning status of the external contact. Sets the provisioning status of the user. Supported values are ENABLED, DISABLED, LOCKED.

--is_deleted

Contacts whose provisioning status is deleted.

--created_by

Identifier of the entity who created the contact.

--modified_by

Identifier of the entity who modified the contact.

--count

Lists the number of contacts. When this option is used, no other information about the contacts is listed.

--show

Lists some or all the attributes of the contact. Valid values are ALL or MORE. If nothing is specified the default important attributes are listed.

--match

Lists all contacts whose attributes match either one or more or all the predicates passed. Permitted values are ALL or ANY. Default is ALL.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_external_contacts

beectl list_external_contacts --count

beectl list_external_contacts --contact 6A95:21EB:extp:D9E9FC8134544BCE9D60559F9B997CCD000000000000 --show ALL

beectl list_external_contacts --email_id person1@example.com --show MORE

beectl list_external_contacts --given_name User1GivenName --show ALL

beectl list_external_contacts --given_name User1% --office_location 4A0% --match ALL --show MORE

list_failed_action_events

List actions that have not completed successfully.

SYNTAX

beectl list_failed_action_events [ --bucket <Partition number> --sequence <Sequence number> ]
 

OPTIONS

--bucket

Partition number

--sequence

Sequence number

EXAMPLES

beectl list_failed_action_events --bucket MyBucketNumber --sequence MySequenceNumber

list_feed_configurations

The list_feed_configurations command lists the feed configurations in the given scope.

SYNTAX

beectl list_feed_configurations    {        --scope <scope identifier>       [--feedtype <feed type >]       | [--feedtype <feed type > --effective_feed_configuration]    }
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Scope in which the feed configuration will be created

--feedtype

st_groups --count </example_message> <examplues are ANNOUNCEMENT, FORUM, FOLDER, LABEL, RECENT, TOPIC and VERSION.

--effective_feed_configuration

Get the effective feed configuration associated with the given scope. Default is true.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_feed_configurations --scope enpr=example

beectl list_feed_configurations --scope enpr=example --feedtype RECENT --effective_feed_configuration True

list_file_plan

Lists the file plan.

SYNTAX

beectl list_file_plan
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_file_plan

list_filesystem_references

Lists the filesystem path, read-only status, and identifier of all available filesystem references.

SYNTAX

beectl list_filesystem_references
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_filesystem_references

list_groups

The list_groups command lists groups that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all groups are listed.

SYNTAX

beectl list_groups    {        --count <true|false>     |        --group <Identifier of the group>        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE|MEMBERS)> ]       |        --email <Email address of the group>       [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE|MEMBERS)>  ]      |        [ --name <name of the group> ... ]       [ --description <description of the group> ... ]        [ --scope <scope of the group> ... ]       [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]        [ --property <name(is_auto_confirm_on|moderator)=value=description> ... ]       [ --address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value>  ]        [ --is_deleted <true|false> ... ]        [ --created_by <identifier of creator> ... ]        [ --modified_by <identifier of modifier> ... ]        [ --match <match attributes(ANY|ALL)> ]        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE|MEMBERS)> ]     }
 

OPTIONS

--group

Identifier of the group

--email

Email id of the group

--name

Name of the group. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--description

Description of the group. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--scope

Scope or parent identifier of the group.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the group belongs to.

--property

Details of the property in the format name=value. Supported names are is_auto_confirm_on, moderator. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value.

--address

Address of the group in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--is_deleted

Groups whose status is deleted.

--created_by

Identifier of the entity who created the group.

--modified_by

Identifier of the entity who modified the group.

--count

Lists the number of groups. When this option is used, no other information about the groups is listed.

--show

Lists some or all attribute or the members of the group. Valid values are ALL or MORE OR MEMBERS. If nothing is specified the default important attributes are listed.

--match

Lists groups whose attributes match either one or more or all the predicates passed. Permitted values are ALL or ANY. Default is ALL.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_groups

beectl list_groups --count

beectl list_groups --group grup=group1,enpr=example --show all

beectl list_groups --email group1@example.com --show more

beectl list_groups --group grup=group1,enpr=example --show MEMBERS

beectl list_groups --name Group1Name --show all

beectl list_groups --name Group1% --scope enpr=enpr1 --match all --show more

list_ischedule_servers

List remote iSchedule Server configurations.

SYNTAX

beectl list_ischedule_servers [--name <name>] 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the remote server configuration, can contain only alpha numerical characters, underscores and dashes.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_ischedule_servers --name remoteserver

list_language_pack

Displays summarized informations for the resources in language pack. The search criteria can include a combination of string contained in the resource name, locale of the resource, type of resource (built-in or custom). Note that only resources matching ALL (as compared to ANY) specified search criteria are displayed.

SYNTAX

beectl list_language_pack [--full | --base_name --locale --only_built_in --only_custom] 
 

OPTIONS

--full

List all resources in the language pack.

--base_name

List resources containing the specified name.

--locale

List resources with the specified locale.

--only_built_in

List only built-in resources.

--only_custom

List only custom resources.

EXAMPLES

Below command will display summarized information for resources which have been localized for English locale with names containing the string CommandImplRB, irrespective of whether they are built-in or custom.

beectl list_language_pack --base_name CommandImplRB --locale en

list_ldap_change_number

Lists the last change-log number processed by beehive for specified profile.

SYNTAX

beectl list_ldap_change_number --profile <profile>
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Name of the profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_ldap_change_number --profile MyDirectoryProfileName

list_local_acl

Lists the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

SYNTAX

beectl list_local_acl --entity <unique identifier of the entity>
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity for which the Local Access Control List (LACL) should be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_local_acl --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_max_address_count

The list_max_address_count command lists the maximum number of addresses of an address type that can be set for a given person-contact, group-contact or resource-contact in an address-book. The address types determine the type of address like BUSINESS, PERSONAL and OTHER. This command also lists the system defined maximum limit, which cannot be exceeded.

SYNTAX

beectl list_max_address_count  
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_max_address_count

list_my_conferences

Lists conference artifacts under workspace

SYNTAX

beectl list_my_conferences --count-limit <A count limit for a list of conferences>
 

OPTIONS

--count-limit

A count limit for a list of conferences

EXAMPLES

beectl list_my_conferences --count-limit 1000

list_operation_statuses

List the Operation Statuses

SYNTAX

beectl list_operation_statuses [--operation_status <CollabId of the Operation Status you would like to display.>] [--name <List Operation Statuses with this name.>] [--status_code <COMPLETED | EXECUTING | FAILED | TIMED_OUT.  List Operation Statuses with this status code.>] [--operation <List Operation Statuses with this Operation.>] [--sort_by <name | modified_on. The sort order of the Operation Statuses.  Sorting by name will be ascending and sorting by modified_on will be descending.  Default is sorting by name.>]
 

OPTIONS

--operation_status

CollabId of the Operation Status you would like to display.

--name

List Operation Statuses with this name.

--status_code

COMPLETED | EXECUTING | FAILED | TIMED_OUT. List Operation Statuses with this status code.

--operation

List Operation Statuses with this Operation.

--sort_by

name | modified_on. The sort order of the Operation Statuses. Sorting by name will be ascending and sorting by modified_on will be descending. Default is sorting by name.

--countLimit

The maximum number of Operation Statuses that will be returned. If not specified, 200 will be returned.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_operation_statuses --operation_status 1CF3:35AF:opst:6828B43CD3944E06A5CD425F0225CF2500000000004C

beectl list_operation_statuses --status_code EXECUTING --sort_by modified_on

list_organizations

Lists organizations in the given scope

SYNTAX

beectl list_organizations --scope <Identifier of enterprise or organization> [--recurse <TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE. Recursively list organizations>] [--name <Organization name>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Identifier of the parent scope (enterprise or organization)

--recurse

TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE. Recursively list organizations

--name

Organization name

EXAMPLES

beectl list_organizations --scope enpr=test_enterprise --recurse TRUE

beectl list_organizations --scope enpr=test_enterprise --name MyOrg

list_patch_informations

Lists the patch information for given archives.

SYNTAX

beectl list_patch_informations (--archive_directory <directory containing archives> | --archive_file <archive file> )
 

OPTIONS

--archive_directory

Directory in which archives will be searched.

--archive_file

Enterprise archive file for listing the patch information.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_patch_informations --archive_file /tmp/some_service.ear --archive_file /tmp/some_service2.ear

Above command will list private and public patch numbers for given archive files.

beectl list_patch_informations --archive_directory /seed/archive/

Above command will list private and public patch numbers for all the files available in the given directory.

list_policies

Lists policies in an specific container. Details returned include policy names and identifiers.

SYNTAX

beectl list_policies [ --policy_name <name of the policy to be listed> ] [ --scope <container where the policy is deployed> ] [ --children <boolean specifying whether to include policies defined at child containers> ] [ --enforced <boolean specifying whether to include enforced policies> ][ --policy_type <name of the policy classification to be listed> ]
 

OPTIONS

--policy_name

Specify the name of the policy.

--scope

Specify the identifier of the container where policy is deployed.

--children

Specify whether to include policies defined at child containers.

--enforced

Specify whether to include enforced policies.

--policy_type

Specify the type of policy to list [general|audit|record]. Default is [general].

EXAMPLES

beectl list_policies --policy_name MyPolicy --scope enpr=MyEnterprise --children true --enforced false--policy_type policyType

list_policy_actions

Lists all policy actions.

SYNTAX

beectl list_policy_actions
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_policy_actions

list_policy_schemas

Lists policy schemas in the current enterprise. Details returned include policy schema names and identifiers.

SYNTAX

beectl list_policy_schemas --name <name of the policy schema> --policy_type <name of the policy classification to be listed>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Specify the name of the policy schema.

--policy_type

Specify the type of policy to list [general|audit|record]. Default is [general].

EXAMPLES

beectl list_policy_schemas --name ExamplePolicySchema --name policyType

list_policy_templates

Lists policy templates in a specified container. Details returned include policy template names and identifiers.

SYNTAX

beectl list_policy_templates --name <name of the policy template to be listed> --scope <container where the policy template is defined>--policy_type <name of the policy classification to be listed>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Specify the name of the policy template.

--scope

Specify the identifier of the container where policy template is deployed.

--policy_type

Specify the type of policy to list [general|audit|record]. Default is [general].

EXAMPLES

beectl list_policy_templates --name ExamplePolicyTemplate --scope enpr=oracle --policy_type policyType

list_ports

Lists various available ports.

By default it shows ports used by current midtier only.

Valid protocols are

SMTP

IMAP

XMPP

XMPPS

FTP

HTTP

HTTPS

BTP

BTPS

OC4J-JGROUP-RANGE

OC4J-AJP-RANGE

OC4J-RMI-RANGE

OC4J-RMIS-RANGE

OC4J-JMS-RANGE

OC4J-SIP-RANGE

OC4J-AJP-RANGE identifies the range of ports in current site for either AJP or secure AJP protocol whichever is enabled.

Description of command output:-

ists general and advanced visibility data.</option> </options> <descr

2- Listen Port:- The value of the port on which listening component is listenning. This is the value which will be seen in operating system port management utilities like netstat.

3- Virtual Port:- Port to which the clients will connect. This value is for entire site.

4- Defining Component:- Identifier of the component, port property is modeled.

5- Property Name:- Name of the property for port on the defining configuration object.

6- Listen Component:- Identifier of the configuration object which listens on the listen port.

SYNTAX

beectl list_ports [--instance <beehive instance system identifier or alias>] [--all] [--configuration_version <required version>]
 

OPTIONS

--instance

System object identifier of Beehive Instance for which ports should be shown.

--all

Flag indicating if all the ports in the system should be listed.

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_ports --all

Above example lists ports used by all the midtiers.

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

list_preference_profiles

The list_preference_profiles command lists preference profiles for a consumer.

SYNTAX

beectl list_preference_profiles --consumer <Identifier of the consumer>
 

OPTIONS

--consumer

Identifier of the consumer

EXAMPLES

beectl list_preference_profiles --consumer user=user1

list_preference_properties

The list_preference_properties command lists all effective preference properties of a preference set.

SYNTAX

beectl list_preference_properties --set <Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.>
 

OPTIONS

--set

Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_preference_properties --set prfs=set1,user=user1

list_preference_sets

The list_preference_sets command lists all preference sets for a preference profile.

SYNTAX

beectl list_preference_sets --profile <Preference profile identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Identifier of the preference profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_preference_sets --profile prfp=MyProfile,user=user1

list_privileges

Lists available Privilege names.

SYNTAX

beectl list_privileges
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_privileges

list_properties

Prints property value of a component given a component identifier and property name. If property name is not specified then all the properties will be listed.

SYNTAX

beectl list_properties --component <system object identifier or alias of the component> [--name <name>] [--configuration_version <required version>] [--advanced] [--all_visibilities]
 

OPTIONS

--component

Component identifier

--name

Name of the property

--configuration_version

Specifies configuration version. Valid values are proposed, active or any number equivalent to creation time of the configuration snapshot. Refer to the first column from the output of command list_configuration_versions for valid snapshot identifiers.

--advanced

Lists advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities

Lists general and advanced visibility data.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_properties --component 288d5051-2632-4800-b796-b3e16ca58f2d

Specifying Configuration Version: Any of the following can be specified for accessing specific snapshot. If not specified, latest active snapshot will be accessed.

--configuration_version 89098787 can be passed to use snapshot having specific creation time as 89098787.

--configuration_version active can be passed for active snapshot.

--configuration_version proposed can be passed for latest proposed snapshot.

Specifying Visibility Options: Any of the following options can be used for specific visibility data.

--advanced can be passed to include advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities can be passed to include general and advanced visibility data.

list_property_metadata

Lists the metadata about all the properties of a system model object.

SYNTAX

beectl list_property_metadata --type <System model object type> [--full_report]
 

OPTIONS

--type

Type of the component for which property metadata to be listed.

--full_report

Flag indicating if full report should be displayed. It contains description about properties also.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_property_metadata --type WorkspacesService

list_remote_repositories

Lists remote repositories.

SYNTAX

beectl list_remote_repositories --scope <Remote Repository Container.> [ --name <Remote Repository Name.>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Repository Container.

--name

Remote Repository Name.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_remote_repositories --scope myRemoteRepositoryScope --name myRemoteRepositoryName

list_remote_repository_definitions

Lists seeded remote repository definitions.

SYNTAX

beectl list_remote_repository_definitions [ --name <Remote Repository Definition Name.>]
 

OPTIONS

--name

Remote Repository Definition Name.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_remote_repository_definitions --name myRemoteRepositoryDefinitionName

list_remote_shares

Lists remote shares.

SYNTAX

beectl list_remote_shares --scope <Remote Share Container.> [ --name <Remote Share Name.>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Share Container.

--name

Remote Share Name.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_remote_shares --scope myRemoteShareScope --name myRemoteShareName

list_resources

Lists resources.

SYNTAX

beectl list_resources {[--select_by_name <name_regex>] | [--select_by_identifier <identifier_regex>] | [--select_by_capacity <capacity>]} [--external] [--show <DEFAULT | ALL | MORE>]
 

OPTIONS

--select_by_name

Specify the resource name criteria. This option accepts a regular expression match.

--select_by_identifier

Specify the resource identifier criteria. This option accepts a regular expression match.

--select_by_capacity

Specify the resource capacity.

--external

List external resources. If this option is not specified, only bookableresources will be listed.

--show

t; ] ]<ome or all the attributes of the resource. Valid values are DEFAULT, ALL or MORE. If nothing (or DEFAULT) is specified the default important attributes are listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_resources --select_by_name "Resource"

list_role_definitions

Lists RoleDefinition entities.

SYNTAX

beectl list_role_definitions [--scope <unique identifier of the Scope>] [--name <like string>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Specify the unique identifier of the Scope of the RoleDefinitions to be listed. If not specified the Scope will be the Enterprise.

--name

Specify the name pattern of the RoleDefinitions to be listed. If not specified all accessible RoleDefinitions will be returned.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_role_definitions --scope wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyRoleDefinition

list_schema_clones

Search the ocs_clone_registry table based on the specified options and display the matched clone records.

SYNTAX

beectl list_schema_clones [ --orig_schema_id <from_schema_id> ] [ --cloned_schema_id <to_schema_id> ] [ --phase <clone_phase> ] [ --status <clone_status> ] [ [ --start_time <clone_start_time> ] | [ --start_time_from <from_time> ] [ --start_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --end_time <clone_end_time> ] | [ --end_time_from <from_time> ] [ --end_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ --description <schema_description> ] [ [ --maximum_results <max_results> ] [ --sort_by <sort_colum_name> ] [ --display_column <display_column> ] | [ --count_only <true/false> ] ]
 

OPTIONS

--orig_schema_id

Option used to match the original schema id from which the new schema is cloned.

--cloned_schema_id

Option used to match the new schema id which is being cloned.

--phase

Option used to match the clone phase.

--status

Option used to match the clone status.

--start_time

The time stamp option specified to match the clone start time.

--start_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the clone start time.

--start_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the clone start time.

--end_time

The time stamp option specified to match the clone end time.

--end_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the clone end time.

--end_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the clone end time.

--description

Option used to match the description.

--maximum_results

Option specified to limit the returned results. This option will be ignored, if the count_only option is true.

--sort_by

Option specified the column name by which the returned result will be sorted. Valid column names are: <CLONENO | ORIG_SCHEMA_ID | CLONED_SCHEMA_ID | PHASE | STATUS | START_TIME | END_TIME | DESCRIPTION>.

--display_column

Option specify which column to display. Valid column names are: <CLONENO | ORIG_SCHEMA_ID | CLONED_SCHEMA_ID | PHASE | STATUS | START_TIME | END_TIME | DESCRIPTION>.

--count_only

Option specified to only return only the total count of records matching the criteria.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_schema_clones --start_time_from 2008-07-10T00:00:00 --start_time_to 2008-07-10T23:59:59 --orig_schema_id 56 --display_column ORIG_SCHEMA_ID --display_column CLONED_SCHEMA_ID --display_column STATUS --maximum_results 200

beectl list_schema_clones --count_only true

list_schemas

Search the ocs_schema_registry table based on the specified options and display the matched schema records.

SYNTAX

beectl list_schemas [ --schema_name <name> ] [ --schema_id <id> ] [ --version_id <id> ] [ --schema_type <type> ] [ --status <status> ] [ --description <description> ] [ [ --creation_time <time> ] | [ --creation_time_from <from_time> ] [ --creation_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --activationready_time <time> ] | [ --activationready_time_from <from_time> ] [ --activationready_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --upgradeready_time <time> ] | [ --upgradeready_time_from <from_time> ] [ --upgradeready_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --activation_time <time> ] | [ --activation_time_from <from_time> ] [ --activation_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --legacy_time <time> ] | [ --legacy_time_from <from_time> ] [ --legacy_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --24} <time> ] | [ --deacitvation_time_from <from_time> ] [ --deacitvation_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --deinstall_time <time> ] | [ --deinstall_time_from <from_time> ] [ --deinstall_time_to <to_time> ] ] [ [ --maximum_results <max_results> ] [ --sort_by <sort_colum_name> ] [ --sort_by <display_column> ] | [ --count_only <true/false> ] ]
 

OPTIONS

--schema_name

Option used to match the schema name.

--schema_id

Option used to match the schema id.

--version_id

Option used to match the version id.

--schema_type

Option used to match the schema type.

--status

Option used to match the schema status.

--creation_time

The time stamp option specified to match the creation time.

--creation_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the creation time.

--creation_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the creation time.

--activationready_time

The time stamp option specified to match the activation ready time.

--activationready_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the activation ready time.

--activationready_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the activation ready time.

--upgradeready_time

The time stamp option specified to match the upgrade ready time.

--upgradeready_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the upgrade ready time.

--upgradeready_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the upgrade ready time.

--activation_time

The time stamp option specified to match the activation time.

--activation_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the activation time.

--activation_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the activation time.

--legacy_time

The time stamp option specified to match the legacy time.

--legacy_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the legacy time.

--legacy_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the legacy time.

--deacitvation_time

The time stamp option specified to match the deactivation time.

--deacitvation_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the deactivation time.

--deacitvation_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the deactivation time.

--deinstall_time

The time stamp option specified to match the deinstall time.

--deinstall_time_from

The time stamp option specified as the lower inclusive bound to match the deinstall time.

--deinstall_time_to

The time stamp option specified as the upper inclusive bound to match the deinstall time.

--description

Option used to match the description.

--maximum_results

Option specified to limit the returned results. This option will be ignored, if the count_only option is true.

--sort_by

Option specified the column name by which the returned result will be sorted. Valid column names are: <SCHEMA_NAME | SCHEMA_ID | VERSION_ID | SCHEMA_TYPE | STATUS | CREATION_TIME | ACTIVATIONREADY_TIME | UPGRADEREADY_TIME | ACTIVATION_TIME | LEGACY_TIME | DEACTIVATION_TIME | DEINSTALL_TIME | DESCRIPTION>.

--display_column

Option specify which column to display. Valid column names are: <SCHEMA_NAME | SCHEMA_ID | VERSION_ID | SCHEMA_TYPE | STATUS | CREATION_TIME | ACTIVATIONREADY_TIME | UPGRADEREADY_TIME | ACTIVATION_TIME | LEGACY_TIME | DEACTIVATION_TIME | DEINSTALL_TIME | DESCRIPTION>.

--count_only

Option specified to only return only the total count of records matching the criteria.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_schemas --creation_time_from 2008-07-10T00:00:00 --creation_time_to 2008-07-10T23:59:59 --schema_name BEE_CODE --display_column schema_name --display_column schema_id --display_column creation_time --maximum_results 200

beectl list_schemas --count_only true

list_sensitivities

Lists Sensitivity entities.

SYNTAX

beectl list_sensitivities --workspace <unique identifier of the Workspace> [--name <like string>]
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Specify the unique identifier of the Workspace of the Sensitivities to be listed.

--name

Specify the name pattern for the Sensitivities to be listed. If not specified all accessible Sensitivities will be returned.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_sensitivities --workspace wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MySensitivity

list_sensitivity_acl

Lists the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity.

SYNTAX

ecify the uniqnsitivity_acl --sensitivity <unique identifier of the Sensitivity>
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity whose Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) should be listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_sensitivity_acl --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_statistics

Lists the statistics for a given type or component or for the entire site.

SYNTAX

beectl list_statistics ([--type <System model object type>] [--component <stat provider system model object identifier or alias>] | [--all_components]) [--advanced] [--all_visibilities]
 

OPTIONS

--type

Type of the component for which statistics to be listed.

--component

System object identifier of the component for which statistics to be listed.

--all_components

If specified, statistics for all components will be listed.

--advanced

Lists advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities

Lists general and advanced visibility data.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_statistics --type WorkspacesServiceInstance

Above example will list statistics for WorkspacesServiceInstance with GENERAL visibility.

Specifying Visibility Options: Any of the following options can be used for specific visibility data.

--advanced can be passed to include advanced visibility data.

--all_visibilities can be passed to include general and advanced visibility data.

list_supported_entity_types

Prints the supported entity types which can be used in business object distinguished naming pattern instead of system generated identifier and their description.

If a value contains \ (back slash) or a , (comma), then it has to be escaped using back slash. For example, "wksp=Personal workspace\, Admin,orgn=HR,enpr=oracle" refers to Workspace of name "Personal workspace, Admin" that exists in Organization "HR" that exists directly in Enterprise "Oracle".

SYNTAX

beectl list_supported_entity_types 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_supported_entity_types

list_tasklist_permissions

List the access control permissions of a user, resource or workspace's tasklist. When multiple tasklists match the selection criteria for the user, resource or workspace, the default tasklist will be used.

SYNTAX

beectl list_tasklist_permissions { --tasklist <tasklistid> | --tasklistowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> }
 

OPTIONS

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of a tasklist.

--tasklistowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or team workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format 'scheme:value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto is assumed.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_tasklist_permissions --select_by_address user@example.com

list_tasklists

Lists existing tasklists of a user, resource or workspace.

SYNTAX

beectl list_tasklists { --tasklist <tasklistid> --tasklistowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> }[--show <DEFAULT | ALL | MORE>]
 

OPTIONS

--tasklist

<usage>beecue identifier of a tasklist.

--tasklistowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or team workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format 'scheme:value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto is assumed.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--show

Lists some or all the attributes of the tasklist. Valid values are DEFAULT, ALL or MORE. If nothing (or DEFAULT) is specified the default important attributes are listed.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_tasklists --select_by_address user@example.com

list_template_evolution_target_workspaces

Lists the workspaces to which the latest version of the given workspace template needs to be applied to make the workspaces conform to the latest version of the template

SYNTAX

beectl list_template_evolution_target_workspaces --template <Workspace template identifier> --limit <Maximum number of workspaces to upgrade>
 

OPTIONS

--template

Workspace template identifier

--limit

Maximum number of workspaces to upgrade

EXAMPLES

beectl list_template_evolution_target_workspaces --template wstp=test_team_ws_template,enpr=test_enterprise --limit 100

list_timezones

Lists time zones in the database.

SYNTAX

beectl list_timezones [--all] | [--select_by_common] [--select_by_name <TimezoneName>]
 

OPTIONS

--all

Lists all time zones. This option cannot be used with the --select_by_name or --select_by_common option.

--select_by_common

Lists common time zones. This is the default when no options are specified.

--select_by_name

Specifies a time zone name. To list all time zones, use an asterisk(*) as the options value.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_timezones --all

beectl list_timezones --select_by_common

beectl list_timezones --select_by_name Asia/Shanghai

beectl list_timezones --select_by_common --select_by_name Asia/Shanghai

list_trusted_identity

This command lists the trusted identities. The type has to be specified. For type SES, it lists the names of the trusted entities.

SYNTAX

beectl list_trusted_identity --type <(WSSEC|S2S|SES)>
 

OPTIONS

--type

Type of the trusted identity. Permitted values are SES or WSSEC. SES refers to Secure Enterprise Search. WSSEC refers to Web services security.

EXAMPLES

list_user_subscriptions

List user subscriptions

SYNTAX

beectl list_user_subscriptions --subscriber <identifier of subscriber> [ --attach <identifier of attached entity> --source_entity_class <sourceEntityClass of template> ]
 

OPTIONS

--subscriber

Specify the identifier of the subscriber who owns the subscription.

--attach

Specify the Identifier of the entity to which the subscription is attached.

--source_entity_class

Specify the name of the source entity Class that is defined in subscription template.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_user_subscriptions --subscriber user=user1

list_users

The list_users command lists users that match specified search criteria. If search criteria are not specified, then all users are listed.

SYNTAX

oratl list_users    {        --count <true|false>     |        --user <User Identifier>        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)> ]       |        --email <Email address of the user>       [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)>  ]      |        [ --family_name <family name of the user> ... ]       [ --given_name <given name of the user> ... ]        [ --display_name <display name of the user> ... ]       [ --middle_name <middle name of the user> ... ]        [ --job_title <job title of the user> ... ]       [ --prefix <prefix of the user> ... ]        [ --suffix <suffix of the user> ... ]        [ --nick_name <nick name of the user> ... ]        [ --office_location <office location of the user> ... ]        [ --company <company of the user> ... ]        [ --profession <profession of the user> ... ]        [ --department <department of the user> ... ]        [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]        [ --property <name=value=description> ... ]        [ --address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]        [ --status <status of user(enabled|disabled|locked|marked_for_delete)> ... ]        [ --is_deleted <true|false>  ]        [ --created_by <identifier of creator> ... ]        [ --modified_by <identifier of modifier> ... ]        [ --match <match attributes(ANY|ALL)> ]        [ --show <show attributes(ALL|MORE)> ]        [ --manager <manager identifier> ]        [ --extended_enterprise_user <true|false> ]        [ --is_locked <locked status(user)> ]        [ --external_inbox <true|false> ]     }
 

OPTIONS

--user

Identifier of the user.

--email

Exact email id of the user whose details have to be retrieved. It should be in the format user1@example.com

--family_name

Family name of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--given_name

Given name of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--display_name

Display name of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--middle_name

Middle name of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--job_title

Job title of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--prefix

Prefix of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--suffix

Suffix of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--nick_name

Nickname of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--office_location

Office location of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--company

Company of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--profession

Profession of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--department

Department of the user. SQL wildcards '%' and '_' are also permitted. The % and _ characters will be treated as literals if preceded by the '\' character. Examples: doc1% will return doc1 and doctest whereas doctest_ will return doctest2. doc_ will return doc1 and doc_. doc\_ will return doc_. Exact match is found if no wildcards exists.

--manager

Identifier of the manager.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the user belongs to.

--property

Details of the property in the format name=value. All custom properties are supported. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value.

--address

ive bound for matching with the scan date.</option> <option name="scandate_to" mandatory="false" data_type="DATE_TIME">Value specified will be used as the upper inclusive bound for matching with the scan date. </option> <option name="virus_name" mandatory="false" data_type="STRING">Value specified wradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--status

Sets the provisioning status of the user. Supported values are ENABLED, DISABLED.

--is_deleted

Users whose provisioning status is deleted.

--extended_enterprise_user

Lists all extended enterprise user.

--external_inbox

Lists all users whose external inbox is set.

--created_by

Identifier of the entity who created the user.

--modified_by

Identifier of the entity who modified the user.

--count

Lists the number of users. When this option is used, no other information about the users is listed.

--show

Lists some or all the attributes of the user. Valid values are ALL or MORE. If nothing is specified the default important attributes are listed.

--match

Lists users whose attributes match either one or more or all the predicates passed. Permitted values are ALL or ANY. Default is ALL.

--is_locked

locked status of user, valid value is (user).

EXAMPLES

beectl list_users

beectl list_users --count

beectl list_users --user user=user1@example.com --show ALL

beectl list_users --email user1@example.com --show MORE

beectl list_users --given_name User1GivenName --show ALL

beectl list_users --given_name User1% --office_location 4A0% --match ALL --show MORE

beectl list_users --manager user=user2@example.com --extended_enterprise_user --match ALL --show MORE

beectl list_users --address BUSINESS_1:mailto:%@example.com --address BUSINESS_1:mailto:user1@example.com --match ANY --show ALL

list_version_configuration

Lists the version configuration on the given scope or heterogenous folder.

SYNTAX

beectl list_version_configuration --container <Configuration scope or heterogenous folder> --effective <TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE>
 

OPTIONS

--container

Scope or heterogenous folder on which the version configuration should be listed.

--effective

Whether the effective version configuration should be returned or the one directly defined.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_version_configuration --container orgn=MyOrganization,enpr=MyEnterprise

list_virus_scan_policy

Lists the virus scan policy configured for the Site. Valid values for the scan policy are: NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR, SCAN_ONLY, SCAN_AND_REPAIR. Default is NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR.

SYNTAX

beectl list_virus_scan_policy
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

<beectl list_virus_scan_policy>

list_virus_scan_results

Lists the virus scan results that match the specified criteria. Only a count of the matches found will be displayed if the option to list only the counts is specified. Option count_only cannot be specified with options maximum_results or display_columns. Option scandate cannot be specified with options scandate_from or scandate_to.

SYNTAX

beectl list_virus_scan_results [ [ --scandate <scandate> ] | [ --scandate_from <scandate_from> ] [ --scandate_to <scandate_to> ] ] [ --virus_name <virus_name> ] [ --virus_id <virus_id> ] [ --entity_type <entity_type> ] [ --obsolete_only <true/false> ] [ [ --maximum_results <max_results> ] [ --display_columns <display_colummns> ] | [ --count_only <true/false> ] ]
 

OPTIONS

--display_columns

Comma separated list of columns to display. Valid arguments are [virus_id, virus_name, component_name, scan_date, repair_attempts, entity_id, entity_type, repaired, aux_data, collab_id]. If this option is not specified all columns will be displayed.

--scandate

Value specified will be used to do an exact match with the scan date attribute of the scan results.

--scandate_from

Value specified will be used as the lower inclusive bound for matching with the scan date.

--scandate_to

Value specified will be used as the upper inclusive bound for matching with the scan date.

--virus_name

TUSINITIATED">Speill be used to do an exact match with the virus name attribute of the scan results.

--virus_id

Value specified will be used to do an exact match with the virus id attribute of the scan results.

--entity_type

Value specified will be used to pick up only the scan results for the entered entity type.

--obsolete_only

This option returns matches found for the specified criteria only for those entities that are obsolete, i.e. these entities no longer exists in the system.

--maximum_results

Value specified limits the number of results returned.

--count_only

This option returns only a total count of matches found for the specified criteria.

EXAMPLES

<beectl list_virus_scan_results --scandate_from 2008-07-10T00:00:00 --scandate_to 2008-07-10T23:59:59 --entity_type emsg --maximum_results 10 --display_columns entity_id,entity_type,virus_id,virus_name>

<beectl list_virus_scan_results --count_only true>

list_voice_facilities

The list command shows all of the facilities, their collab ids and phone number matching rules. The command accepts three optional parameters to help refine the search, if no parameters are specified, then all facilities are presented.

SYNTAX

beectl list_voice_facilities [--group_collabid <collabid>] [--includes <phone rule>] [--excludes <phone rule>] [--phone <phone number>]
 

OPTIONS

--group_collabid

The group collabid to search for. The list will show the facility the group collabid belongs to.

--includes

The inclusion rule to search for. For example: 1312???????. The list will show the facility that has the given inclusion rule.

--excludes

The exclusion rule to search for. For example: 1312???????. The list will show the facility that has the given exclusion rule.

--phone

The phone number to match against all known facilities. For example, specifying 13125551212 will result in a list of all facilities that match ordered such that the top of the list is the first match.

EXAMPLES

beectl list_voice_facilities --group_collabid grup=GroupName,enpr=MyEnterprise

beectl list_voice_facilities --includes 1312???????

beectl list_voice_facilities --excludes 1312???????

beectl list_voice_facilities --phone 13125551212

list_workspace_templates

Lists all workspace templates

SYNTAX

beectl list_workspace_templates --scope <Identifier of enterprise or organization> [--name <Workspace template name>] [--domain <Workspace template domain>] [--file <Full path of the output file>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Identifier of enterprise or organization

--name

Workspace template name

--domain

Workspace template domain

--file

Full path of the output file

EXAMPLES

beectl list_workspace_templates --scope orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise

beectl list_workspace_templates --scope orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --name Test_template --domain Test_domain --file /tmp/template.xml

list_workspaces

Lists workspaces in an organization or enterprise

SYNTAX

beectl list_workspaces --scope <Identifier of enterprise or organization> [--type <p (Personal) | t (Team) | a (All)>] [--name <Workspace name>] [--recurse] [--countLimit <count>]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Identifier of enterprise or organization

--type

p (Personal) | t (Team) | a (All)

--name

Workspace name

--recurse

Recursively list workspaces in all organizations

--countLimit

The maxium number of workspaces that can be returned. If not specified, a default value of 200 will be assumed

EXAMPLES

beectl list_workspaces --scope orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --type t

beectl list_workspaces --scope enpr=test_enterprise --name My_Workspace

list_xmpp_chat_rooms

Used to list all currently existing XMPP chat rooms.

SYNTAX

beectl list_xmpp_chat_rooms
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl list_xmpp_chat_rooms

modify_access_control_fields

Modifies the AccessControlFields of an existing entity.

This command alters sensitive data in the system. Oracle recommends using this command with caution.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_access_control_fields --entity <unique identifier of the entity> [--owner <unique identifier of the owner Accessor>] [--owner_access_types <owner access types string>] [--sensitivity <unique identifier of the Sensitivity>] [--{7} <unique identifier of the Scope>]
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity to be modified.

--owner

Modify the owner of the entity. Specify the unique identifier of the new owner.

--owner_access_types

Modify the access types string for the entity's owner.

--sensitivity

Modify the Sensitivity of the entity. Specify the unique identifier of the new Sensitivity.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_access_control_fields --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --owner user=MyUser

modify_assigned_role

Modifies an existing AssignedRole entity.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_assigned_role --assigned_role <unique identifier of the AssignedRole> [--name <name of AssignedRole>] [--description <description>] [--assigned_scope <unique identifier of the assigned Scope>] [--role_definition <unique identifier of the assigned RoleDefinition>] [[--accessor <unique identifier of an Accessor>]...] [[--add_accessor <unique identifier of an Accessor>]...] [[--remove_accessor <unique identifier of an Accessor>]...]
 

OPTIONS

--assigned_role

Specify the unique identifier of the AssignedRole to be modified.

--name

Modify the name of the AssignedRole.

--description

Modify the description of the AssignedRole.

--assigned_scope

Modify the assigned Scope of the AssignedRole. Specify the unique identifier of the new assigned Scope.

--role_definition

Modify the assigned RoleDefinition of the AssignedRole. Specify the unique identifier of the new RoleDefinition.

--accessor

Modify the set of Accessors. Specify the unique identifier of an Accessor. This option can be specified more than once.

--add_accessor

Adds an Accessor. Specify the unique identifier of an Accessor to add. This option can be specified more than once.

--remove_accessor

Removes an Accessor. Specify the unique identifier of an Accessor to remove. This option can be specified more than once.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_assigned_role --assigned_role acar=MyAssignedRole,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyAssignedRole2

modify_attendant

Update an existing attendant with a new markup file or rename it.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_attendant { --file <aaml file> | --name <attendant name> --new_name <new name> }
 

OPTIONS

--file

An auto-attendant markup language file describing the attendant to be added. When specified, name and new_name must be specified.

--name

Name of an existing attendant. Must be specified when 'new_name' is specified. Must not be specified when 'file' is specified

--new_name

The name to which the attendant should be changed. Must be specified when 'name' is specified. Must not be specified when 'file' is specified

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_attendant --file /var/attendant.aaml

beectl modify_attendant --name myattendant --new_name myattendant2

modify_audit_policy

Modifies an existing audit policy

SYNTAX

beectl modify_audit_policy --policy <Audit policy identifier> [--file <Full path of the input file>] [--enable <true|false>]
 

OPTIONS

--policy

Audit policy identifier

--file

Full path of the input file

--enable

true: Enable audit policy

--enable

false: Disable audit policy

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_audit_policy --policy plcy=MyAuditPolicy --file /tmp/policy_ex.xml

beectl modify_audit_policy --policy plcy=MyAuditPolicy --enable false

modify_audit_trail

Modifies an existing audit trail

SYNTAX

beectl modify_audit_trail --trail <Audit trail identifier> --file <Full path of the input file>
 

OPTIONS

--trail

Audit trail identifier

--file

Full path name of the input XML file

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_audit_trail --trail autr=MyAuditTrail --file /tmp/trail_ex.xml

modify_calendar

Modify various attributes of the selected calendar.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_calendar { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } [--name <name>] [--booking_characteristics <booking_characteristices>] [--allow_double_booking <allow_double_booking> ] [--include_in_freebusy <include_in_freebusy>] [--priority <priority>] [--sensitivity <sensitivity>] [--enrollment_type <enrollment_type>] [--self_enrollment <self_enrollment>] [--caldav_resource_name <caldav_resource_name>] [--derive_timezone <derive_timezone>] [--timezone <timezone>] [--derive_available_hours <derive_available_hours>] [--available_hours <available_hours>] [--enable_presence <enable_presence>] [--enroll_members <enroll_members>]
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--name

Modify the calendar name.

--booking_characteristics

Modify the calendar booking behavior. Permitted values are O for Open, F for FirstComeFirstServed, case insensitive.

--allow_double_booking

Modify the calendar double booking behavior. Permitted values are Y for Yes (allow double booking), N for No (deny double booking), case insensitive.

--include_in_freebusy

Modify if this calendar is included in free busy. Permitted values are Y for Yes, N for No, case insensitive.

--priority

Modify the default priority of the calendar. Permitted values are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and NONE, case insensitive.

--sensitivity

Modify the default sensitivity of the calendar. Permitted values are PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL and PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--enrollment_type

Modify the enrollment type of the calendar. Permitted values are PUBLIC, PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--self_enrollment

Modify the self enrollment status for the calendar. Permitted values are OPEN, CLOSED, case insensitive. This option applies to Team Workspace only.

--caldav_resource_name

Modify the caldav resource name of the calendar.

--derive_timezone

Modify the calendar's 'derives timezone from the owner' configuration. Permitted values are Y (derive the calendar timezone from its owner's timezone) or N.

--timezone

Modify the timezone of the calendar.

--derive_available_hours

Modify the calendar's 'derives available hours from the owner' configuration. Permitted values are Y (derive the calendar available hours from its owner's timezone) or N.

--available_hours

Modify the available hours of the calendar.

--enable_presence

Modify the calendar presence integration configuration. Permitted values are Y (enable presence integration) or N. This option does not apply to Team Workspace.

--enroll_members

Modify the calendar's team workspace members enrollment configuration. Permitted values are Y (automatically enroll workspace members) or N . This option applies to Team Workspace only.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_calendar --select_by_address user@example.com

modify_calendar_enrollments

Modify the enrollment list of the specified team workspace calendar.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_calendar_enrollments { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } { --enroll <loginid> | --unenroll <loginid>}
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--enroll

Explicitly enroll the specified user to the team workspace calendar.

--unenroll

Explicitly unenroll the specified user from the team workspace calendar.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_calendar_enrollments --select_by_address user@example.com --enroll user=user1

modify_calendar_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified calendar.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_calendar_permissions  { --calendar <calendarid> | --calendarowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> | --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name>} --user <userid> | --group <groupid> [--user_principal | --delegated_principal]  [--can_invite | --cannot_invite] [--manage <sensitivity> ...] [--read <sensitivity> ...] [--discover <sensitivity> ...] [--deny <sensitivity> ...]
 

OPTIONS

--calendar

Specify the unique identifier of a calendar.

--calendarowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource using the format '[scheme:]value'. If 'scheme:' is not supplied, mailto will be used.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--user

Specify the unique identifier of the user (grantee).

--group

Specify the unique identifier of the group (grantee).

--user_principal

Set permissions to user only (do not modify any access given to this user as delegate).

--delegated_principal

Set permissions to delegated principal only (do not modify any access given to this user directly).

--can_invite

Specify the grantee (user or group) can invite this calendar.

--cannot_invite

Specify the grantee (user or group) cannot invite this calendar.

--manage

Grant manage access (delegate) to the grantee (user) on specified sensitivities of this calendar. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--read

Grant read access to the grantee (user or group) on specified sensitivities of this calendar. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--discover

Grant discover access to the grantee (user or group) on specified sensitivities of this calendar. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--deny

Deny the grantee (user or group) access to contents in this calendar on the specified sensitivities. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_calendar_permissions --calendarowner user=user1 --user user=user2 --can_invte --manage PUBLIC --read NORMAL --read PRIVATE

modify_category

Modifies an existing category

SYNTAX

beectl modify_category --category <Category identifier> --file <Full path of the category XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--category

Category to be updated.

--file

Full path name of the XML file. The file must contain properly formatted data to update the category

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_category --category catg=MyCategory,enpr=MyEnterprise --file /tmp/category.xml

modify_category_configuration

Updates a given category configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_category_configuration --configuration <Configuration identifier> --file <Full path of the configuration XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

Category configuration to be updated.

--file

Full path of the category configuration XML file. The file must contain properly formatted data.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_category_configuration --configuration 9941:2345:ctcf:58D193D162CE4ED89FF66AB4E55745B6345464545453 --file /tmp/configuration.xml

modify_coexistence_profile

Create or modify the coexistence profile of a user.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_coexistence_profile {--user <user_identifier>|--email <user_email>|{--file <file_name>|--select_users_without_profile|--select_users_with_profile} --errors_file <file_name>} --system_affinity <system_name> [--accessible_system <system_name> ...] [--no_data_import] [--force_retry]
 

OPTIONS

--user

Specify the identifier of the user.

--email

Specify the email address of the user.

--select_users_without_profile

Specify all beehive users without a coexistence profile.

--select_users_with_profile

Specify all beehive users with a coexistence profile.

--file

Specify the xml input file. File encoding MUST be UTF-8.

--errors_file

Specify the output file. This file will only be generated if errors occurs.

--system_affinity

Specify the system affinity of the user.

--accessible_system

Specify the collaboration system which can be access by the user.

--no_data_import

Specify to disable default data import.

--force_retry

Specify to reset the NextAttempt time to current time. Only applies to coexistence profile that are not completed.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_coexistence_profile --user user=userid --accessible_system beehive --system_affinity sys_name

beectl modify_coexistence_profile --file users.xml --accessible_system sys_name --errors_file errors.xml

beectl modify_coexistence_profile --select_users_without_profile --accessible_system sys_name

beectl modify_coexistence_profile --user user=userid --force_retry

modify_coexistence_system

Modifies a coexisting remote system.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_coexistence_system --select_by_name <old_name> [--name <name>] [--product_name <product_name>] [{--url <url>|--host_name <host_name> --port <port_number> {--use_http|--use_https}}] [--partnership_key] [--query_capabilities] [--timezone_alias_namespace <timezone_alias_namespace>]
 

OPTIONS

--select_by_name

Specify the actual name of the coexisting remote system.

--name

Specify the name of the coexisting remote system.

--product_name

Specify the new name of the coexisting remote system.

--url

Specify the URL of the coexisting remote system.

--use_http

Specify that "HTTP" MUST be used for the coexisting remote system.

--use_https

Specify that "HTTPS" MUST be used for the coexisting remote system.

--host_name

Specify the host name of the coexisting remote system.

--port

Specify the port number used by the coexisting remote system.

--partnership_key

Specify the partnership key of the coexisting remote system.

--timezone_alias_namespace

Specify the timezone alias namespace used by the coexisting remote system.

--query_capabilities

Force the coexistence service to query the remote system for its capabilities.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_coexistence_system --select_by_name ex-101 --url http://example.com:7777

modify_connection_pool

Modifies the connection pool configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_connection_pool [--connection_pool <connection pool system model identifier or alias>] [--max_connections <maximum connections>] [--min_connections <minimun connections>] [--max_statement_limit <maximum cached statements>] [--initial_connections <initial connections>] [--connection_wait_timeout <connection wait timeout>] [--inactivity_timeout <inactivity timeout>] [--time_to_live_timeout <time to live timeout>] [--abandoned_connection_timeout <abandon connection timeout>] [--lower_threshold_limit <lower threshold limit>] [--property_check_interval <property check interval>] [--validate_connection <true/false>] 
 

OPTIONS

--connection_pool

Connection pool system object identifier.

--max_connections

Maximun number of connections in connection pool.

--min_connections

Number of minimum connections in connection pool.

--max_statement_limit

Maximum number of cached statements in connection pool.

--initial_connections

Number of initial connections in connection pool.

--connection_wait_timeout

Connection wait timeout.

--inactivity_timeout

Inactivity timeout.

--time_to_live_timeout

Time to live timeout.

--abandoned_connection_timeout

Abandoned connection timeout.

--lower_threshold_limit

Lower threshold limit.

--property_check_interval

Property check interval.

--validate_connection

Should connection be validated or not.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_connection_pool --connection_pool 232323-der344-455-3455ded --max_connections 40

modify_database

Modifies given database configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_database --database <database instance id or alias> [--schema_name <schema name>] [--connect_string <connect string>] [--schema_password <schema password>] [--xa_service_names <xa schema name> [--xa_service_names < xa schema name>] .. ] [--ons_entry <ons name host:port> [--ons_entry < ons entry host:port>] .. ] [--parent_database <system object identifier of the parent database>
 

OPTIONS

--database

Database system object identifier.

--schema_name

Schema name.

--connect_string

Connection descriptor.

--schema_password

Schema password.

--xa_service_names

Multiple values of xa service names can be given. See the usage.

--ons_entry

Notification server details in form of host:port.

--parent_database

System object identifier of the parent database. When '--parent_database' option presents, all the options other than '--database' will be ignored.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_database --database ab222-aa4-eee333-ddede5 --schema_name schema1

modify_deployment_structure

This command applies the specified template(s) to the local BeehiveInstance. Execute beectl list_deployment_templates command to view the available templates.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_deployment_structure --primary_template <primary template name>  [(--supplementary_template <supplementary template name>) ...] [--physical_memory_available <physical memory>] [--number_of_processors_available <no of processors>] [--bti_control_port <bti control port>] [--bti_server_port <bti server port>] [--disable_sizing] [--cold_add_delete] [--do_not_restart_at_end] [--update_oc4j_soa] [--console_output_verbosity <verbosity level>] [--no_extraction_after_cold_upgrade]
 

OPTIONS

--primary_template

Identifier of the primary template to be applied. The command beectl list_deployment_templates displays the identifiers of available templates.

--supplementary_template

Identifier(s) of the supplementary template(s) to be applied. The command beectl list_deployment_templates displays the identifiers of available templates. A Supplementary Template represents the deployment structure of an oc4j with auxiliary services which augment the structure of the local midtier without changing the primary template.

--physical_memory_available

Amount of physical memory in MB or GB allocated to this BeehiveInstance. For eg 600MB or 10GB. This option updates the property AvailablePhysicalMemoryInMB of the local BeehiveInstance and is used in sizing. This option need not be provided if the value of this property is already set as needed.

--number_of_processors_available

No of processors allocated to this BeehiveInstance. This option updates the property AvailableNumberOfProcessors of the local BeehiveInstance. This option need not be provided if the value of this property is already set as needed.

--bti_control_port

BTI control port. This port is used to get BTI heartbeat by the OPMN daemon. This option is useful to configure or re-configure BTI control port and it need not be specified if BTI is already correctly configured on this midtier.

--bti_server_port

BTI server port. This option is useful to configure or re-configure BTI server port on this midtier and it need not be specified when BTI is already correctly configured on this midtier.

--disable_sizing

Disable automatic sizing. Create only the minimum number of oc4j instances per oc4j template.

--cold_add_delete

If specified, addition and deletion of j2ee components happens in cold mode. By default this happens in hot mode.

--do_not_restart_at_end

If specified, the components are not restarted after deployment. By default components are restarted after deployment.

--update_oc4j_soa

If specified, the oc4j_soa will also be updated. By default, oc4j_soa will not be updated.

--console_output_verbosity

Specifies verbosity level of the console output from the command. Valid values are FINE, INFO, MINIMAL .

EXAMPLES

Below command will apply the mentioned primary and supplementary templates to current midtier. This command "may" wipe off existing deployment structure of the midtier.

beectl modify_deployment_structure --primary_template SERVER_ONLY --supplementary_template EXAMPLE_SUPPLEMENTARY_TEMPLATE --supplementary_template ANOTHER_EXAMPLE_SUPPLEMENTARY_TEMPLATE

Below command will apply the mentioned supplementary template to current midtier without changing any other deployment structure. Configured minimum number of oc4j instances for the specified supplementary template are created.

beectl modify_deployment_structure --supplementary_template EXAMPLE_SUPPLEMENTARY_TEMPLATE --disable_sizing

If --console_output_verbosity <verbosity level> is also provided on command line, console output will be controlled by specified verbosity level.

modify_device

Modifies the device with the given identifier.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_device --device <identifier of the device> --status <status of the device>
 

OPTIONS

--device

Specify the identifier of the device. Use list_devices command to determine the identifier of the device.

--status

Specify the status of the device. The following are the valid device statuses: ACTIVE PROVISIONED BLACKLISTED LOCKDOWN .

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_device --device 1234:5678:devi:2E0329B0705F0E40E040578C92160957000000000434 --status BLACKLISTED

modify_directory_entry

Modifies the directory id and locator for a given directory entry. This command can be used to convert a directory user to an external directory user and vice versa. This command must be executed before a deleted user in the directory gets synced with the Oracle Beehive server, otherwise this change deletes the Oracle Beehive user (user marked for deletion).

SYNTAX

beectl modify_directory_entry --identifier <identifier> --directory_profile <+/-profilename> --directory_identifier <+/-directory-locator> [-- no_validate]  
 

OPTIONS

--identifier

Object identifier. This command supports user and group identifiers. Permitted value is String. This option is mandatory.

--directory_profile

Profile name. Use this option to change the directory profile with which the user is currently syncing. Permitted value is String. This option is mandatory.

--directory_identifier

Directory Locator of the user. Use this option to modify the directory locator of the user, so that a current Oracle Beehive user can be synced with another directory entry present in LDAP. Permitted value is String. This option is mandatory.

--no_validate

Skips the validation of directory profile name and directory identifier.

USAGE

This command can be used in the following scenarios:

  • If you want to sync an Oracle Beehive user with different GUID present in the current LDAP or new LDAP without deleting the user in Oracle Beehive.

  • If you want to sync an Oracle Beehive user with new LDAP by changing directory profile without deleting the user in Oracle Beehive.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_directory_entry --identifier user=user1 --directory_profile MyDirectoryProfileName --directory_identifier A12345

modify_directory_profile

The modify_directory_profile command modifies an existing directory profile. Modification to the profile name cannot be done.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_directory_profile --file <filename> [ --no_validate ]
 

OPTIONS

--file

XML file containing directory profile.

--no_validate

Skips the validation of profile against the directory server.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_directory_profile --file MyDirectoryProfile.xml

beectl modify_directory_profile --file MyDirectoryProfile.xml --no_validate

modify_email_port

Modifies Email service' SMTP or IMAP port number

SYNTAX

beectl modify_email_port --type <smtp|imap> --port <port_number>
 

OPTIONS

--type

Specifies type of the port to be modified. Valid values are imap and smtp.

--port

Port number for the specified port type.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_email_port --type smtp --port 1234

modify_email_queue

Enables or disables Email asynchronous queue processing

SYNTAX

beectl modify_email_queue --type <enable|disable|process|status>
 

OPTIONS

--type

Acceptable options are enable,disable,process,status

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_email_queue --type enable

Resume or enable queue processing.

beectl modify_email_queue --type disable

Disable queue processing.

beectl modify_email_queue --type process

Process all the messages in the email asynchronous queue immediately.

beectl modify_email_queue --type status

Show current status.

modify_enterprise

Modifies an existing enterprise

SYNTAX

beectl modify_enterprise --enterprise <Enterprise identifier> [--name <Enterprise name>] [--description <Description>] [--hard_quota <Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--sub_organization_quota <Default sub-organization quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--team_workspace_hard_quota <Default team workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --team_workspace_soft_quota <Default team workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--personal_workspace_hard_quota <Default personal workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --personal_workspace_soft_quota <Default personal workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--personal_template <Personal workspace default template identifier>] [--team_template <Team workspace default template identifier>]
 

OPTIONS

--enterprise

Enterprise identifier

--name

Enterprise name

--description

Description

--hard_quota

Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--sub_organization_quota

Default sub-organization quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--team_workspace_hard_quota

Default team workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--team_workspace_soft_quota

Default team workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_workspace_hard_quota

Default personal workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_workspace_soft_quota

Default personal workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_template

Personal workspace default template identifier

--team_template

Team workspace default template identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_enterprise --enterprise enpr=test_enterprise --name New_Name --description New_description

beectl modify_enterprise --enterprise enpr=test_enterprise --hard_quota 10000 --sub_organization_quota 1500 --team_workspace_hard_quota 1000 --team_workspace_soft_quota 1000 --personal_workspace_hard_quota 1000 --personal_workspace_soft_quota 1000 --team_template wstp=team_wksp_template,enpr=test_enterprise --personal_template wstp=personal_wksp_template,enpr=test_enterprise

modify_expertise_background_job

Modifies the expertise background jobs.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_expertise_background_job    {        --job <job>        [--start_hour <start hour>]        [--start_minute <start minute>]        [--frequency_minute <frequency minute>]         [--enable <enable>]         [--stop <stop>]     }
 

OPTIONS

--job

Job type of the expertise background job. Allowed values are CONFIDENCE_UPDATER, PROFILING_HANDLER, PROFILE_OPTIMIZER, PROFILE_TRANSFER, RELATIONSHIP_HANDLER and WHOIS_HANDLER.

--start_hour

The scheduled start hour of the job, 0 to 23 inclusive.

--start_minute

The scheduled start minute of the job, 0 to 59 inclusive.

--frequency_minute

The scheduled frequency of the job, in minutes.

--enable

; | --email &lt;Email address of the disables it.

--stop

Flag to stop the job. True stops the job, false has no effect.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_expertise_background_job --job PROFILE_TRANSFER --start_hour 16 --frequency_minute 240

beectl modify_expertise_background_job --job PROFILE_TRANSFER --enable False

beectl modify_expertise_background_job --job RELATIONSHIP_HANDLER --stop True

modify_expertise_entity_searchability

The modify_expertise_entity_searchability command controls whether the specified entity will be searchable or not.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_expertise_entity_searchability  {    --entity <identifier>    --terms_searchable <true/false> | --relationships_searchable <true/false>  } 
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Identifier of the entity whose searchability is to be modified.

--terms_searchable

Whether the entity should be searchable for terms after expertise profiling.

--relationships_searchable

Whether the entity should be searchable for relationships after expertise profiling.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_expertise_entity_searchability --entity 3F5B:23D3:user:40EA125BD4941FBEE040578CA8027E89000000030E6F --terms_searchable true

beectl modify_expertise_entity_searchability --entity user=user1,enpr=oracle --terms_searchable false --relationships_searchable true

modify_expertise_profiling_configuration

The modify_expertise_profiling_configuration command modifies the expertise profiling configuration. The profiling configuration information is supplied in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_expertise_profiling_configuration --file <filename> 
 

OPTIONS

--file

Filename of the XML file containing expertise profiling configuration definition.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_expertise_profiling_configuration --file MyProfilingConfig.xml

modify_expertise_stop_phrases

The modify_expertise_stop_phrases command modifies (add/remove) stop phrases for Expertise service. The phrases are supplied in a XML file

SYNTAX

beectl modify_expertise_stop_phrases --enterprise <enterpise> --action [add|remove] --file <filename> --phrase <phrase>
 

OPTIONS

--enterprise

Identifier of the enterprise for which the stop phrases will be modified.

--action

Action add or remove to be performed.

--file

XML file containing stop phrases.

--phrase

Stop phrase.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_expertise_stop_phrases --enterprise <enterpise> --action add --file AddESP.xml

beectl modify_expertise_stop_phrases --enterprise <enterpise> --action add --phrase phrase1 --phrase phrase2 --file AddESP.xml

modify_expertise_user_scope

The modify_expertise_user_scope command modifies expertise user scope. The expertise user scope information is supplied in a XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_expertise_user_scope --file <filename>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Filename of the XML file containing bodn, description, include_list and exclude_list for the extertise user scope to be modified.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_expertise_user_scope --file MyUserScope.xml

modify_external_contact

The modify_external_contact command modifies existing external contact.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_external_contact    {        --contact <identifier of external contact >      |        --email <ostal-code&gt;?c=&lt;contact>  }    [ --family_name <+/-[locale:]family name> ... ]      [ --given_name <+/-[locale:]given name> ... ]    [ --display_name <+/-[locale:]display name> ... ]     [ --middle_name <+/-[locale:]middle name> ... ]    [ --job_title <+/-[locale:]job title> ... ]     [ --prefix <+/-[locale:]prefix> ... ]    [ --suffix <+/-[locale:]suffix> ... ]     [ --nick_name <+/-[locale:]nick name> ... ]    [ --scope <identifier of contacts parent> ]     [ --office_location <office location of the contact> ]     [ --company <company of the contact> ]     [ --profession <profession of the contact> ]     [ --timezone <timezone of the contact> ]     [ --locale <locale of the contact> ]     [ --department <department of the contact> ]     [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]     [ --remove_organization <organization identifier> ... ]     [ --property <+/-name(assistant|certificate|notes)=value=description> ... ]     [ --address <+/-type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_type <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_scheme <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --primary_address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ]     [ --status <status of contact(enabled|disabled|locked)> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--contact

The identifier of the external contact

--email

Email id of the external contact

--family_name

Family name of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--given_name

Given name of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--display_name

Display name of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--middle_name

Middle name of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--job_title

Job title of the contact in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--prefix

Prefix of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--suffix

Suffix of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--nick_name

Nick name of the contact in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--scope

Identifier of the enterprise under which this contact will be created.

--office_location

Office location of the contact.

--company

Company of the contact.

--profession

Profession of the contact.

--timezone

Timezone of the contact. list_timezones lists the valid timezones

--locale

Locale details of the contact. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--department

Department of the contact.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the contact must be part of.

--remove_organization

Identifiers of the organizations the contact must be removed from.

--property

Details of the property in the format [+/-]name=value=description. Supported names are certificate, assistant and notes. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value or description. + or no symbol means the property should be added. If - is specified that means the property should be removed. Default action is addition.

--address

Address of the contact in the format [+/-]type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the address should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the address should be added. If - is specified that means the address should be removed. Default action is addition.

--default_address_for_type

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified type. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_scheme

Address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified scheme. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--primary_address

Primary address of the contact in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--status

Sets the provisioning status of the external contact. Sets the provisioning status of the user. Supported values are ENABLED, DISABLED, LOCKED.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_external_contact --contact 6A95:21EB:extp:D9E9FC8134544BCE9D60559F9B997CCD000000000000 --given_name User1GivenName --family_name -en_CA:User1FamilyName --office_location 4A037

beectl modify_external_contact --email contact1@example.com --property +prop1:prop1value

beectl modify_external_contact --email contact1@example.com --address +BUSINESS_1:mailto:contact1@example.com --address -BUSINESS_2:im:contact2@example.com

beectl modify_external_contact --email contact1@example.com --status disabled

modify_failed_action_events

Retry actions that have not completed successfully.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_failed_action_events --retry --bucket <Partition number> --sequence <Sequence number>
 

OPTIONS

--retry

Retry the failed action event.

--bucket

Partition number

--sequence

Sequence number

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_failed_action_events --retry --bucket MyBucketNumber --sequence MySequenceNumber

modify_feed_configuration

The modify_feed_configuration command modifies existing feed configurations.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_feed_configuration    {        --feed_configuration <feed configuration>      | --scope <scope identifier>       --feedtype <feed type >        [--name <name >]        [--title <title >]        [--description <description >]         [--image <image >]         [--language <language >]         [--copyright <copyright>]         [--webmaster <webmaster>]         [--managing_editor <managing editor>]     }
 

OPTIONS

--feed_configuration

Collabid of the feed configuration to be modified

--scope

Scope in which the feed configuration will be created

--feedtype

Feed type of the feed configuration. Permitted values are ANNOUNCEMENT, FORUM, FOLDER, LABEL, RECENT, TOPIC and VERSION.

--name

Name of the feed configuration.

--title

Title associated the feed configuration

--description

Description associated the feed configuration

--image

Image associated with this feed configuration

--language

Language associated with the feed configuration

--copyright

Copyright associated with the feed configuration

--webmaster

Webmaster associated with the feed configuration

--managing_editor

Managing Editor associated with the feed configuration

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_feed_configuration --scope enpr=example --feedtype RECENT --name MyFeedConfiguration --title BeehiveFeedConfiguration --description This is my beehive feed configuration.

beectl modify_feed_configuration --feed_configuration 6790:39AC:afrf:52921E226193384EE040578C5C84269C0000000ABB75 --name ForumFeedConfiguration --description This is a forum feed. --image ForumLogo.gif --language en

modify_group

The modify_group command modifies a group. The group information is supplied in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_group --file <filename> [ --ldapbootstrap ]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Filename of the XML file containing group definition.

--ldapbootstrap

LDAP bootstrap flag. If this flag is specified, then uds groups will be created with directory locator and directory id. This is relevant only when --file option is used.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_group --file MyGroups.xml

beectl modify_group --file MyGroups.xml --ldapbootstrap

modify_hostname

Modifies the configuration repository for hostname of the system and updates required configuration files.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_hostname [--start_at_end] [--no_dns_validation] [(--sync | --new_host_name <new host name> [--old_host_name <old host name>]... )] [--ignore_validation_warnings]
 

OPTIONS

--sync

If specified, command will read values from configuration repository and sync it to the system configuration files.

--new_host_name

New host name of the local server.

--old_host_name

Old host names of the local server. This value will be used to replace any of the old host name pattern available in local files.

--start_at_end

If specified, components on current beehive instance will be started after modification to configuration files.

--no_dns_validation

If specified, DNS lookup validation of the new host name will not be performed.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_hostname

Above command will read the values from file system and updates configuration files and configuration repository with it.

beectl modify_hostname --sync --old_host_name oldhost1.example.com --old_host_name oldhost2.example.com

Above command will read the values from configuration repository and update it to all configuration files. There will be no configuration repository updates when this option is used.

beectl modify_hostname --new_host_name demo.example.com --old_host_name oldhost1.example.com --old_host_name oldhost2.example.com

Above example will update configuration repository as well as all other configuration files with new hostname.

Note: Shutdown the midtier before running this command.

This command does not modify iAS instance name.

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

modify_im_preferences

Modifies existing instant message preferences of a user.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_im_preferences --user <user identifier or alias> [--archive <true|false>] [--archive_folder <folder identifier or alias>] [--offline_delivery_channel <mailto|pull>]
 

OPTIONS

--user

The user whose instant message preferences are to be modified.

--archive

Knob to turn user archiving on/off. Set it to true to turn it on or false otherwise.

--archive_folder

Folder to keep the instant message archive for this user.

--offline_delivery_channel

Effects the mode of offline message delivery. A value of "pull" refers to the semantics wherein the messages are kept with the server and are explicitly fetched by a client facing service on behalf of the user upon his next login. A value of "mailto" on other hand refers to the semantics wherein the offline message will be right away sent as an email to the user.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_im_preferences --user user=beehive_test1 --offline_delivery_channel mailto

beectl modify_im_preferences --user 6C3E:0532:user:88E1F9EA3DD341A6B2E18768F17AC838000000000000 --archive true

modify_ischedule_server

Modify a remote iSchedule Server configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_ischedule_server --name <name> [--domain_regexp <regexp>] [--outgoing_url <remote_url>] [--outgoing_auth_id <auth_id>] [--outgoing_auth_key <auth_key>] [--incoming_auth_id <auth_id>] [--incoming_auth_key <auth_key>] [--incoming_allow_ip_regexp <regexp>] [--incoming_allow_host_regexp <regexp>] 
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the remote server configuration, can contain only alpha numerical characters, underscores and dashes.

--domain_regexp

Regular expression that must match the remote user's email address.

--outgoing_url

Address of the remote iSchedule server.

--outgoing_auth_id

Authentication ID that must be used when connecting to the remote server.

--outgoing_auth_key

Key that must be used when connecting to the remote server.

--incoming_auth_id

Authentication ID that the remote server must use when connecting to the Oracle Beehive server.

--incoming_auth_key

Key that the remote server must use when connecting to the Oracle Beehive server.

--incoming_allow_ip_regexp

IP Addresses connecting to the Oracle Beehive server must match this regular expression

--incoming_allow_host_regexp

Host names connecting to the Oracle Beehive server must match this regular expression

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_ischedule_server --name remoteserver --domain_regexp ".*@example.com" --outgoing_url http://remoteserver@example.com/ischedule

modify_ldap_change_number

Modifies the changelog number of a profile.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_ldap_change_number --profile <profilename> --changelog_number <changelognumber>
 

OPTIONS

--profile

Name of the profile.

--changelog_number

Changelog number of the profile.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_ldap_change_number --profile MyDirectoryProfileName --changelog_number 100

modify_local_ace

Replaces an Access Control Entry (ACE) in the Local Access Control List (LACL) of an entity.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_local_ace --entity <unique identifier of the entity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor> [--access_types <access types string>]
 

OPTIONS

--entity

Specify the unique identifier of the entity in which the ACE will be replaced.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of the Accessor to whom the access types will be applied.

--access_types

Specify the access types string for the Accessor.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_local_ace --entity adoc=MyDocument,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser --access_types +RW-D

modify_local_configuration_files

This command updates configuration files local to current midtier with activated changes to centralized configuration. It can restart one or more components on current midtier if needed to make the changes take effect. Some updates to local configuration files require this command to restart all midtier components.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_local_configuration_files [--restart_needed] force_apply
 

OPTIONS

--restart_needed

Indicates if components should be restarted or not. If this option is specified with value false then no component will be stopped/restarted even though changes to local configuration files require a restart of one or more components for taking effect. If this option is specified with value true, and if the changes to local configuration files require a restart of one or more already running components then they will be restarted. The components which were NOT running will NOT be restarted.

--ignore_validation_warnings

If specified, commands using validation framework will ignore the warnings and continue.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_local_configuration_files

Above command will update local configuration files with changes if any and restart one or more midtier components if needed.

beectl modify_local_configuration_files --restart_needed false

Above command will not restart any component but it will display warnings about components which need to be restarted due to changes to local configuration files.

If --ignore_validation_warnings is also specified, warnings from validation framework will be ignored and command execution will continue.

modify_max_address_count

The modify_max_address_count command modifies maximum number of addresses of an address type that can be set for a given person-contact, group-contact or resource-contact in an address-book. The address types determine the type of address like BUSINESS, PERSONAL & OTHER. The maximum count specified in this command must be less than the system defined maximum limit, which can be determined by running list_max_address_count command.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_max_address_count --max_address_count <integer value>  
 

OPTIONS

--max_address_count

Maximum number of addresses of an address-type.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_max_address_count --max_address_count 5

modify_notification_template

Modifies a specified notification template for the Notification service.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_notification_template --file <path to the xml instruction file> 
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and file name of the notification XML file.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_notification_template --file /tmp/nms/UpdateNewInvitationTemplate.xml

modify_oc4j_administrator_password

Modifies oc4j administrator password in central configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_oc4j_administrator_password --admin_password <oc4j adminisrator password> 
 

OPTIONS

--admin_password

New password of the oc4j administrator for Beehive.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_oc4j_administrator_password --admin_password <secure string>

modify_organization

Modifies an existing organization

SYNTAX

beectl modify_organization --organization <Organization identifier> [--name <Organization name>] [--description <Description>] [--hard_quota <Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--sub_organization_quota <Default sub-organization quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--team_workspace_hard_quota <Default team workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --team_workspace_soft_quota <Default team workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--personal_workspace_hard_quota <Default personal workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --personal_workspace_soft_quota <Default personal workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--personal_template <Personal workspace default template identifier>] [--team_template <Team workspace default template identifier>]
 

OPTIONS

--organization

Organization identifier

--name

Organization name

--description

Description

--hard_quota

Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--sub_organization_quota

Default sub-organization quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--team_workspace_hard_quota

Default team workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--team_workspace_soft_quota

Default team workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_workspace_hard_quota

Default personal workspace hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_workspace_soft_quota

Default personal workspace soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--personal_template

Personal workspace default template identifier

--team_template

Team workspace default template identifier

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_organization --organization orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --name New_Name --description New_description

beectl modify_organization --organization orgn=test_org,enpr=test_enterprise --hard_quota 10000 --sub_organization_quota 1500 --team_workspace_hard_quota 1000 --team_workspace_soft_quota 1000 --personal_workspace_hard_quota 1000 --personal_workspace_soft_quota 1000 --personal_template wstp=personal_wksp_template,enpr=test_enterprise --team_template wstp=team_wksp_template,enpr=test_enterprise

modify_patch_information

Add, append or removes the patch information from the given archives.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_patch_information (--archive_file_list  <file containing list of archives> | --archive_directory  <directory containing archives> |  --archive_file <archive name> [--archive_file <archive name> ...])  (--upgrade_conf <patch of upgrade.conf> |  --add_patch <patch id > [--private_patch] [--constituent_patch <constituent patch id> ...] | --delete_patch <patch id to delete> [--delete_patch <patch id to delete> ...]) 
 

OPTIONS

--archive_file_list

A simple text file containing list of archive files which needs to be acted upon. Every line in the file will be taken as one archive file entry relative to current oracle home. Non-archive files will be ignored.

--archive_directory

Directory in which archives will be searched.

--archive_file

Archive file which should be acted upon.

--upgrade_conf

Full path of upgrade.conf which has the upgrade information.

--add_patch

The specified patch will be added in all archives.

--private_patch

The patch specified above is a private patch.

--constituent_patch

Set of constituent patches to the above main patch.

--delete_patch

The specified patch will be removed from all archives.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_patch_information --upgrade_conf --archive_file_list /tmp/upgrade.conf --upgrade_conf /tmp/file_list.txt

Above command will update the archives specified in file list according to the patch information in upgrade.conf.

modify_personal_workspace

Modifies an existing personal workspace

SYNTAX

beectl modify_personal_workspace --workspace <Workspace identifier> [--name <Workspace name>] [--description <Description>] [--hard_quota <Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --soft_quota <Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>]
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Workspace identifier

--name

Workspace name

--description

Description

--hard_quota

Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--soft_quota

Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_personal_workspace --workspace wksp=test_workspace,enpr=Oracle --name New_Name --description New_description

ssage>beectl modify_port --protocol HTTP --port 80 </example_message> <exrd_quota 1000 --soft_quota 1000

modify_policy

Modifies an existing policy using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_policy --file <full path to the policy xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy data.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_policy --file /private/xml/MyPolicy.xml

modify_policy_schema

Modifies an existing policy schema using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_policy_schema --file <full path to the xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy schema data.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_policy_schema --file /private/xml/MyPolicySchema.xml

modify_policy_template

Modifies an existing policy template using data in an XML file.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_policy_template --file <full path to the xml file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the absolute path of the XML file that contains the policy template data.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_policy_template --file /private/xml/MyPolicyTemplate.xml

modify_port

Modifies various ports.

Valid protocols are

SMTP

IMAP

XMPP

XMPPS

FTP

HTTP

HTTPS

BTP

BTPS

OC4J-JGROUP-RANGE

OC4J-AJP-RANGE

OC4J-RMI-RANGE

OC4J-RMIS-RANGE

OC4J-JMS-RANGE

OC4J-SIP-RANGE

OC4J-AJP-RANGE identifies the range of ports in current site for either AJP or secure AJP protocol whichever is enabled.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_port [--protocol <protocol name> [([--virtual_port <virtual port for the site>][--listen_port <listen port for protocol>] |[--port <common port value>])] [--maximum_port <maximum value in the range> --minimum_port <minimum value in the range>]] |[--component <system object identifier or alias> --name <name of the port property> --port <value of the port> ]
 

OPTIONS

--protocol

Name of the protocol for which port needs to be modified.

--virtual_port

Port to which the clients will connect. This value will be modified for the entire site.

--listen_port

The actual port which will be opened on each midtier. Typically a listening port.

--port

Convenience option to set both --virtual_port and --listen_port together with same value.

--component

Identifier of the configuration component to be modified. Combined with --name, this option can be used to modify internal ports. For example control port of the Bti or request port of opmn.

--name

Name of the internal port property on the configuration object identified by --component option.

--maximum_port

Some components allocate free port dynamically during process start. For such processes, only the permitted port range is managed. This option can be used to modify the maximum value of the range for the given protocol.

--minimum_port

Some components allocate free port dynamically during process start. For such processes, only the permitted port range is managed. This option can be used to modify the maximum value of the range for the given protocol.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_port --protocol HTTP --virtual_port 80 --listen_port 7774

Above example modifies virtual and listen port values for HTTP protocol for all midtiers.

beectl modify_port --protocol HTTP --port 80

Above example modifies virtual and listen port values to same given port value for HTTP protocol for all midtiers.

beectl modify_port --protocol HTTPS --port 7445 --component c093d4cc-d9cc-42ae-bc45-4b31fab07190

Above example modifies listen port value for HTTPS protocol for given HttpServer configuration component. This can also be achieved using the beectl modify_property command.

beectl modify_port --component c093d4cc-d9cc-42ae-bc45-4b31fab07190 --name RequestPort --port 2003

Above example modifies port value identified by name RequestPort for given configuration component specified by option --component. This can also be achieved using the beectl modify_property command.

beectl modify_port --protocol OC4J-AJP-RANGE --maximum_port 20601 --minimum_port 20700

Above example modifies port range values for given protocol for all OC4Js in all midtiers. Use option --component to specify the identifier of the OC4J to be modified.

modify_preference_set

The modify_preference_set command modifies the preference set by setting the extends from attribute.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_preference_set --set <Preference set identifier> --extends <Preference set identifier>
 

OPTIONS

--set

Identifier of the preference set specified in id format, which can be determined by running list_preference_sets command with "--entity_format id" option.

--extends

Identifier of the preference set from which the new preference set is extended.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_preference_set --set prfs=set1,user=user1 --extends prfs=set2,user=user2

modify_property

Modifies the value(s) of a named property of the component identified by --component. Multiple values can be set for one property.

Note :- Option value should not start with hyphen(-). If an option value starts with hyphen, use any one of the following syntaxes. 1. Use <option-name>=<option value> format. This is the preferred way to specify the option values starting with hypens. 2. Prepend the option value with string "ESCAPE:". 3. Prepend the option value with backslash "\\". This is the least preferred way. This may not work in some platforms, esp in windows platforms it will not work.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_property --component <system object identifier or alias> --name <name> [ --file <filename> | --revert_to_default | --value <value>... ]
 

OPTIONS

--component

component id.

--name

Name of the property.

--value

Value of the property.

--file

The contents of this file would be assigned as the value of the specified property. The property MUST be of type String.

--revert_to_default

flag indicating, if values need to be reverted back as original.

EXAMPLES

The command execution shown below would set the BaseLogLevel property of the config object to FINE.

beectl modify_property --component 486318ac-f162-477b-814f-140836c257af --name BaseLogLevel --value FINE

The command execution shown below would revert back the BaseLogLevel property of the config object to the initial default value, if any. If there is no initial default value configured for this property on this config object then the value would be cleared.

beectl modify_property --component 486318ac-f162-477b-814f-140836c257af --name BaseLogLevel --revert_to_default

The command execution shown below would set the contents of the specified file as the value of the PostResolutionRules property of the config object. The property PostResolutionRules must be of type String.

beectl modify_property --component 520118ac-f162-477b-814f-452106c257cb --name PostResolutionRules --file /tmp/post_resolution_rules.xml

The command execution shown below would set the values starting '-' to the StartParameter property of the config object. The property StartParameter must be of type String.

beectl modify_property --component 520118ac-f162-477b-814f-452106c257cb --name StartParameter --value="-Dhttp.maxFileInfoCacheEntries=-1 -ms128M -mx512M"

modify_remote_repository

Modifies the name and/or the description of a Remote Repository.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_remote_repository --scope <Remote Repository Container.> --name <Remote Repository Name.> [ --new_name <The new name for the Remote Repository.> ] [ --new_description <The new description for the Remote Repository.> ] [ { --online <Turn the repository online.> | --offline <Turn the repository offline.> } ]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Repository Container.

--name

Remote Repository Name.

--new_name

The new name for the Remote Repository.

--new_description

The new description for the Remote Repository.

--online

Turn the repository online.

--offline

Turn the repository offline.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_remote_repository --scope myRemoteRepositoryScope --name myRemoteRepositoryName --new_name myNewRemoteRepositoryName --new_description myNewRemoteRepositoryDescription --offline

modify_remote_share

Modifies the name and/or the description of a Remote Share.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_remote_share --scope <Remote Share Container.> --name <Remote Share Name.> [ --new_name <The new name for the Remote Share.> ] [ --new_description <The new description for the Remote Share.> ] [ { --online <Turn the share online.> | --offline <Turn the share offline.> } ]
 

OPTIONS

--scope

Remote Share Container.

--name

Remote Share Name.

--new_name

The new name for the Remote Share.

--new_description

The new description for the Remote Share.

--online

Turn the share online.

--offline

Turn the share offline.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_remote_share --scope myRemoteShareScope --name myRemoteShareName --new_name myNewRemoteShareName --new_description myNewRemoteShareDescription --offline

modify_resource_classifications

This command set the given category as resource root classification.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_resource_classifications [--enterprise <enterpriseid>] --category <categoryid>
 

OPTIONS

--enterprise

Deprecated option. Use --scope instead.

--category

Category identifier to set as root classification.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_resource_classifications --category 395A:346B:catg:2C5F7E98E076D382E040578CA60B0D0E000000062022

modify_resources

Modifies an existing resource.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_resources {--resource resourceid | --select_by_name name } [--name <name>]         [--email_address <email address>] [--phone_number <phone_number>] [--website <website>] [--postal_address <postal address>]         [--identifier <identifier>] [--booking_info <booking info>] [--description <description>]         [--timezone <timezoneid>] [--location <location>] [--capacity <capacity>]         [--add_approver <approverid>][--delete_approver <approverid>]         [--booking_characteristics <[O]pen>|<[F]CFS>] [--scope <organization>] [--custom_processing <[T]rue>|<[F]alse>]         [--accessible_by <everyone | nobody | groupid | userid> ]   beectl modify_resources {--resource resourceid | --select_by_name name } --external [--name <name>]         [--email_address <email address>] [--phone_number <phone_number>] [--website <website>] [--postal_address <postal address>]         [--capacity <capacity>] [--timezone <timezone name>] [--location <location>]         [--booking_info <booking info>] [--description <description>] [--scope <organization>]
 

OPTIONS

--resource

Resource ID.

--select_by_name

modify a resource by name

--name

Modify the name of the resource.

--email_address

Modify the BUSINESS_1 e-mail address of the resource.

--phone_number

Modify the BUSINESS_1 phone number of the resource.

--website

Modify the BUSINESS_1 web site of the resource.

--postal_address

Specify the BUSINESS_1 postal address of the resource. The required format is: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country>. All fields are optional but at least one field must appear in a valid address of this type. For example, orapostal:l1=1, Main Street is a valid address. The ? character must not be encoded when used as a separator; it must be encoded in all other cases. For example orapostal:l1=1?l2=Which Street%3F?code=12345 is a valid address; but orapostal:l1=1?l2=Which Street??code=12345 is not a valid address because the question mark appearing as part of the address "Which Street?" is not encoded.

--timezone

Modify the timezone of the resource.

--location

e="sensitivity" mandatory="true" data_type="BOMe. It must be a xHTML string.

--identifier

Modify the identifier of the resource.

--capacity

Modify the capacity of the resource.

--external

Modify an external resource. If this option is not specified, the command modifies bookable resources.

--add_approver

Resource approver to add.

--delete_approver

Resource approver to delete.

--booking_characteristics

Specify resource default calendar booking characteristic. Specify [O] for Open or [F] for First Come First Serve, case insensitive.

--booking_info

Specify resource booking information. It must be a xHTML string.

--description

Specify the description of the resource. It must be a xHTML string.

--scope

Specify the new enterprise/organization the resource will be attached to.

--custom_processing

Specify if this resource requires custom processing. Specify "T", "True", "F" or "False", case insensitive.

--accessible_by

Specify who can access this resource. It must be one of "everyone", "nobody", a group id or finally a user id, case insensitive. Use "everyone" to reset the accessibility to the default for the resource.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_resources --resource 395A:346B:bkrs:2C5F7E98E076D382E040578CA60B0D0E000000062327 --name "Resource2" --capacity 3

modify_role_definition

Modifies an existing RoleDefinition entity.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_role_definition --role_definition <unique identifier of the RoleDefinition> [--name <name of RoleDefinition>] [--description <description>] [[--privilege <privilege name>]...] [[--add_privilege <privilege name>]...] [[--remove_privilege <privilege name>]...] [--access_types <access types string>] [--always_enabled <boolean value>]
 

OPTIONS

--role_definition

Specify the unique identifier of the RoleDefinition to be modified.

--name

Modify the name of the RoleDefinition.

--description

Modify the description of the RoleDefinition.

--privilege

Modify the privileges of the RoleDefinition. To determine a list of valid privilege arguments, use the list_privileges command. This option can be specified more than once.

--add_privilege

Add privileges to the RoleDefinition. To determine a list of valid privilege arguments, use the list_privileges command. This option can be specified more than once.

--remove_privilege

Remove privileges from the RoleDefinition. To determine a list of valid privilege arguments, use the list_privileges command. This option can be specified more than once.

--access_types

Modify the access types for the RoleDefinition.

--always_enabled

Modify the AlwaysEnabled option of the RoleDefinition. Specify the TRUE argument to enable, and FALSE to disable.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_role_definition --role_definition acrd=MyRoleDefinition,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MyRoleDefinition2

modify_secure_property

This command updates the sensitive property of the system model object identified by the --component.

Note :- Option value should not start with hyphen(-). If an option value starts with hyphen, use any one of the following syntaxes. 1. Use <option-name>=<option value> format. This is the preferred way to specify the option values starting with hypens. 2. Prepend the option value with string "ESCAPE:". 3. Prepend the option value with backslash "\\". This is the least preferred way. This may not work in some platforms, esp in windows platforms it will not work.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_secure_property --component <system object identifier or alias> --name <name> --value <obfuscated value> --obfuscated
 

OPTIONS

--component

component id.

--name

Name of the property.

--value

Value of the property.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_secure_property --component d4261c24-e917-4e37-9777-41799ef9abe8 --obfuscated --name AdminPassword --value

modify_sensitivity

Modifies an existing Sensitivity entity.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_sensitivity --sensitivity <unique identifier of the Sensitivity> [--name <name of Sensitivity>] [--description <description>] [--sensitivity_only <boolean value>] [--delegatable <boolean value>]
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity to be modified.

--name

Modify the name of the Sensitivity.

--description

Modify the description of the Sensitivity.

--sensitivity_only

Modify the SensitivityOnly option for the Sensitivity. Specify the TRUE argument to enable, and FALSE to disable.

--delegatable

Modify the Delegatable option for the Sensitivity. Specify the TRUE argument to enable, and FALSE to disable.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_sensitivity --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --name MySensitivity2

modify_sensitivity_ace

Replaces an Access Control Entry (ACE) in the Sensitivity Access Control List (SACL) of a Sensitivity entity.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity <unique identifier of the entity> --accessor <unique identifier of the Accessor> [--access_types <access types string>]
 

OPTIONS

--sensitivity

Specify the unique identifier of the Sensitivity in which the ACE will be replaced.

--accessor

Specify the unique identifier of the accessor to whom the access types were applied.

--access_types

Specify the access types string for the Accessor.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_sensitivity_ace --sensitivity acsn=MySensitivity,wksp=MyWorkspace,enpr=MyEnterprise --accessor user=MyUser --access_types +RW-D

modify_tasklist

Modify various attributes of the selected tasklist.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_tasklist { --tasklist <tasklistid> | --tasklistowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> --select_by_user_name <user_name> | --select_by_resource_name <resource_name> | --select_by_workspace_name <workspace_name> } [--name <name>] [--priority <priority>] [--sensitivity <sensitivity>] [--caldav_resource_name <caldav_resource_name> [--derive_timezone <derive_timezone>] [--timezone <timezone>]
 

OPTIONS

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of a tasklist.

--tasklistowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user, resource or team workspace.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user, resource or team workspace using the format 'scheme:value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto is assumed.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--select_by_resource_name

Specify the name of a resource.

--select_by_workspace_name

Specify the name of a team workspace.

--name

Modify the tasklist name.

--priority

Modify the default priority of the tasklist. Permitted values are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and NONE, case insensitive.

--sensitivity

Modify the default sensitivity of the tasklist. Permitted values are PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL and PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--caldav_resource_name

Modify the caldav resource name of the tasklist.

--derive_timezone

Modify the tasklist's 'derives timezone from the owner' configuration. Permitted values are Y (derive the tasklist timezone from its owner's timezone) or N.

--timezone

Modify the timezone of the tasklist.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_tasklist --select_by_address user@example.com --name newName

modify_tasklist_permissions

Modify access permissions for grantee (user or group) on the specified tasklist.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_tasklist_permissions  { --tasklist <tasklistid> | --tasklistowner <unique_identifier> | --select_by_address <uri> | --select_by_authuser <authuser> | --select_by_user_name <user_name> } --user <userid> | --group <groupid> [--user_principal | --delegated_principal] [--can_assign | --cannot_assign] [--manage <sensitivity> ...] [--read <sensitivity> ...] [--deny <sensitivity> ...]
 

OPTIONS

--tasklist

Specify the unique identifier of a tasklist.

--tasklistowner

Specify the unique identifier of a user.

--select_by_address

Specify the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of a user using the format 'scheme:value'. If scheme is not supplied, mailto is assumed.

--select_by_authuser

Specify the login name of a user.

--select_by_user_name

Specify the name of a user.

--user

Specify the unique identifier of the target user.

--group

Specify the unique identifier of the target group.

--user_principal

Set permissions to user only.

--delegated_principal

Set permissions to delegated principal only.

--can_assign

Specify the grantee (user or group) can assign this tasklist.

--cannot_assign

Specify the grantee (user or group) cannot assign this tasklist.

--manage

Grant manage access (delegate) to the grantee (user) on specified sensitivities of this tasklist. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--read

Grant read access to the grantee (user or group) on specified sensitivities of this tasklist. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

--deny

Deny the grantee (user or group) access to contents in this tasklist on the specified sensitivities. Permitted values are: PUBLIC, NORMAL, CONFIDENTIAL, PERSONAL AND PRIVATE, case insensitive.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_tasklist_permissions --tasklistowner user=user1 --user user=user2 --can_assign --manage PUBLIC --read NORMAL --read PRIVATE

modify_team_workspace

Modifies an existing team workspace

SYNTAX

beectl modify_team_workspace --workspace <Workspace identifier> [--name <Workspace name>] [--description <Description>] [--add_participant <User or group identifier> [--role <Role definition identifier>]] [--remove_participant <User or group identifier>] [--email_address <Team workspace email address>] [--participation_mode <Team workspace participation mode. Value can be INVITE_ONLY, OPEN, or APPROVE_REQUIRED>] [--directory_listed <TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE>] [--hard_quota <Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota> --soft_quota <Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota>] [--workspace_owner <Workspace owner identifier>] [--enable_public_access <true | false>] [--public_access_role <Role definition identifier for public access>]
 

OPTIONS

--workspace

Workspace identifier

--add_participant

Add a user or group to the team workspace

--role

Workspace role definition identifier for the participants to be added

--remove_participant

Remove a user or group from the team workspace

--email_address

Team workspace email address

--participation_mode

Team workspace participation mode. Value can be INVITE_ONLY, OPEN, or APPROVE_REQUIRED

--directory_listed

TRUE|FALSE. Default value is FALSE

--workspace_owner

Workspace owner identifier

--enable_public_access

Whether to enable public access. If true is specified, option public_access_role must be specified

--public_access_role

Role definition identifier for public access

--name

Workspace name

--description

Description

--hard_quota

Hard quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

--soft_quota

Soft quota in megabytes (MB). Use 'UNLIMITED' for unlimited quota

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_team_workspace --workspace wksp=myWorkspace,enpr=Oracle --add_participant user=userId --role acrd=workspace-coordinator,enpr=Oracle --email_address teamworkspace@company.com --participation_mode OPEN --directory_listed TRUE

modify_timezones

Modify a time zone.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_timezones {--select_by_name <TimeZoneName> [--common] | --timezone <TimeZoneCollabId> [--common] | --reset_to_default}
 

OPTIONS

--timezone

Time zone ID. This option is optional and can be entered only once.

--select_by_name

Select time zone by name. This option is optional and can be entered only once.

--common

Set the specified time zone as common. This option is optional and can be entered only once.

--reset_to_default

Reset time zones to factory default. This option is optional and can be entered only once.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_timezones --select_by_name America/New_York

beectl modify_timezones --reset_to_default

modify_trusted_identity

This command modifies the details of the trusted identity. At least one of the options new_service_name or new_key_alias need to be specified for this modification if the type is WSSEC. If the type of identity is not specified, it is defaulted to WSSEC.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_trusted_identity  [--type WSSEC --service_name <Trusted Identity Name> [--new_service_name <New Trusted Identity Name>] [--new_key_alias <new key alias>]]  [--type S2S --service_name <Trusted Identity Name> [--new_service_name <New Trusted Identity Name>] [--new_password <New Trusted Identity Password>]]  [--type SES --name <Trusted Entity Name> --new_name <New Trusted Entity Name> --new_password <New Trusted Entity Password>]
 

OPTIONS

--service_name

String value of the service principal name with which it will be identified in Beehive. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--new_service_name

String value of the new service principal name with which it will be identified in Beehive. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--new_key_alias

The new alias of the service which is used to register the certificate in the wallet. This option is mandatory if type is WSSEC.

--type

String value indicating the type of trusted identity: SES or WSSEC.SES refers to Secure Enterprise Search. WSSEC refers to Web services security.

--name

String value representing the name of the SES trusted entity.

--new_name

String value representing the new name of the SES trusted entity.

--new_password

String value representing the new password of the SES trusted entity.

EXAMPLES

modify_urm_urls

update urm urls

SYNTAX

beectl modify_urm_urls 
 

OPTIONS

This command has no options

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_urm_urls

modify_user

The modify_user command modifies exisiting users.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_user    {        --user <User Identifier>      |        --email <Email address of the user>    }    [ --family_name <+/-[locale:]family name> ]      [ --given_name <+/-[locale:]given name> ... ]    [ --display_name <+/-[locale:]display name> ... ]     [ --middle_name <+/-[locale:]middle name> ... ]    [ --job_title <+/-[locale:]job title> ... ]     [ --prefix <+/-[locale:]prefix> ... ]    [ --suffix <+/-[locale:]suffix> ... ]     [ --nick_name <+/-[locale:]nick name> ... ]    [ --scope <identifier of users parent> ]    [ --office_location <office location of the user> ]     [ --company <company of the user> ]    [ --profession <profession of the user> ]     [ --timezone <timezone of the user> ]     [ --locale <locale of the user> ]     [ --department <department of the user> ]     [ --assistant <assistant identifier> ]     [ --manager <manager identifier> ]     [ --organization <organization identifier> ... ]     [ --remove_organization <organization identifier> ... ]     [ --login_id <+/-login_id>  ]     [ --login_password <password> ]     [ --voice_principal <+/-voice devicenumber> ]     [ --voice_pin <pin> ]     [ --property <+/-name=value=description> ... ]     [ --protocol_principal <+/-protocol principal> ]     [ --protocol_password <protocol password> ]     [ --address <+/-type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_type <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --default_address_for_scheme <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ... ]     [ --primary_address <type of address(business_1|other_5|personal_4|proxy_1|...):scheme(im|mailto|...):value> ]     [ --status <status of user(enabled|disabled|locked)> ]    [ --external_inbox <true|false> ]     [ --delegate <[+][delegated_principal_name]:identifier_of_delegator or -delegated_principal_identifier> ]    [ --lock <principal/account to be locked(PRIMARY|PROTOCOL|VOICE|USER)> ]     [ --unlock <principal/account to be unlocked(PRIMARY|PROTOCOL|VOICE|USER)> ]    [ --public_presence <ENABLE|DISABLE> ]     [ --extended_enterprise_user <true|false> ] 
 

OPTIONS

--user

Identifier of the user.

--email

Exact email id of the user whose details have to be retrieved. It should be in the format user1@example.com

--family_name

Family name of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--given_name

Given name of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--display_name

Display name of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]address-line-1&gt;?l2=&lt;address-line-2&gt;?box=&lt;post-box-number&gt;?cy=&lt;city&gt;?st=&lt;state&gt;?code=&lt;postal-code&gt;?c=&lt;country&gt; where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESSeter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--middle_name

Middle name of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--job_title

Job title of the user in the format: value or locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--prefix

Prefix of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--suffix

Suffix of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--nick_name

Nick name of the user in the format: [+/-]value or [+/-]locale:value. If only value is specified, the assumed value of locale is en_US. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the parameter should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the parameter should be added. If - is specified that means the parameter should be removed. Default action is addition.

--scope

Identifier of the enterprise or organization under which this user will be created.

--office_location

Office location of the user. To unset the previously defined value pass either of the following strings: NULL or null.

--company

Company of the user. To unset the previously defined value pass either of the following strings: NULL or null.

--profession

Profession of the user. To unset the previously defined value pass either of the following strings: NULL or null.

--timezone

Timezone of the user. list_timezones lists the valid timezones

--locale

Locale details of the user. Example of locales are en, en_US, en_CA, zh_CN, fr_FR, ja_JP, etc.

--department

Department of the user. To unset the previously defined value pass either of the following strings: NULL or null.

--assistant

Identifier of the assistant.

--manager

Identifier of the manager.

--organization

Identifiers of the organizations the user must be part of.

--remove_organization

Identifiers of the organizations the user must be removed from.

--property

Details of the property in the format [+/-]name=value=description. All custom properties are supported. Note, no equals to symbol(=) should be present in the name or value or description. + or no symbol means the property should be added. If - is specified that means the property should be removed. Default action is addition.

--address

Address of the user in the format [+/-]type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the address should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the address should be added. If - is specified that means the address should be removed. Default action is addition.

--default_address_for_type

Address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified type. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--default_address_for_scheme

Address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Sets the specified address as the default for the specified scheme. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country> where all fields l1, l2, box, cy are optional but at least one of them should be present. Supported types are BUSINESS_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--primary_address

Primary address of the user in the format type:scheme:value. Supported schemes are mailto, tel, fax, ftp, http, https, im, imap, ldap, news, nntp, oraalert, oraassistantphone, oracallback, oraisdn, oramobile, oracarphone, orapager, orapostal, orapush, oraradio, orasms, oratelex, orattyttd, oravmail, pres, sip, urn, xmpp. Note: orapostal should be of the format: l1=<address-line-1>?l2=<address-line-2>?box=<post-box-number>?cy=<city>?st=<state>?code=<postal-code>?c=<country>s> <option name="configuration" mandatory="true" data_type="BOM_OBJECT_ID">Version configuration to be updated.<_1 to BUSINESS_5, PERSONAL_1 to PERSONAL_5, OTHER_1 to OTHER_5, PROXY_1 to PROXY_25.

--login_id

The login credentials of the user. A user can have only one login id. Hence if a user already has a login id then the old value will be replaced with the new value.

--login_password

Login password.

--voice_principal

Voice principal of the user. A user can have only one voice principal. Hence if a user already has a voice principal then the old value will be replaced with the new value.

--voice_pin

Pin number for the voice device.

--protocol_principal

Protocol principal of the user. A user can have only one protocol principal. Hence if a user already has a protocol principal then the old value will be replaced with the new value.

--protocol_password

Protocol password.

--status

Sets the provisioning status of the user. Supported values are ENABLED, DISABLED.

--external_inbox

Boolean values which indicates if user's inbox is external or not. Supported values are TRUE, FALSE.

--delegate

Details of the delegated principal in the format principal_name:delegated_identifier or -delegated_principal_identifer. principal_name is the name of the delegated principal that will be created and delegated_identifier is the identifier of the actor who is being delegated. + or - in the start of the string tells whether the principal should be added or removed. + or no symbol means the delegated principal should be added. If the principal name contains a colon(:) it should be properly escaped. If - is specified that means the delegated principal should be removed. In this case only the identifier of the delegated principal has to be specified. Default action is addition. While removing the principal the minus sign (-) has to be escaped. Example: use a s ESCAPE:-. For more details on escaping please refer to beectl help.

--lock

Locks the principal sepcified. Valid values are PRIMARY, PROTOCOL, VOICE, USER. USER will lock account of the user.

--unlock

Unlocks the principal sepcified. Valid values are PRIMARY, PROTOCOL, VOICE, USER. USER will unlock account as well as all the principals of the user.

--public_presence

Enables or disables the public presence of the users (ability of unauthorized users to see someone's presence). Supported values are ENABLED, DISABLED.

--extended_enterprise_user

Boolean if user is an external user or not.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --given_name User1GivenName --family_name -en_CA:User1FamilyName --office_location 4A037

beectl modify_user --email user1@example.com --property +employee_number=1234

beectl modify_user --email user1@example.com --address BUSINESS_1:mailto:user1@example.com --address ESCAPE:-BUSINESS_2:im:user1@example.com

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --voice_principal 1234567 --voice_pin 123423 --protocol_principal ESCAPE:-protocolPrincipal

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --lock PROTOCOL

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --unlock PRIMARY

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --unlock USER

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --nick_name +en:User1NickName --assistant user=user3 --manager user=user2

beectl modify_user --email user1@example.com --status disabled

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --delegate DelegatedPrincipalName:user=user2

beectl modify_user --user user=user1 --delegate ESCAPE:-pcpd=CalendarDelegation2,user=rafiul2

modify_user_subscription

Enables or disables an existing subscription

SYNTAX

beectl modify_user_subscription {--enable {true|false} --subscription <Subscription identifier> | --disable_all_subscriptions_for_user <identifier of subscriber>}
 

OPTIONS

--enable

Enable or disable the subscription. Permitted values are 'true' (enable subscription) or 'false' (disable subscription)

--subscription

Specify the identifier of the subscription.

--disable_all_subscriptions_for_user

Specify the identifier of the subscriber who owns the subscription.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_user_subscription --enable true --subscription 5457:7954:subs:337F34E37E8E81F1E040578C921630B700000000B864

beectl modify_user_subscription --disable_all_subscriptions_for_user user=john.smith

modify_version_configuration

Updates a given version configuration.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_version_configuration --configuration <Configuration identifier> --file <Full path of the configuration XML file>
 

OPTIONS

--configuration

-component 5792bd5f-3b46-42de-a15d-8

--file

Full path of the version configuration XML file. The file must contain properly formatted data.

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_version_configuration --configuration 9941:2345:avcg:58D193D162CE4ED89FF66AB4E55745B6345464545453 --file /tmp/configuration.xml

modify_virus_scan_policy

Modifies the virus scan policy configured for the Site. Valid values for the scan policy are: NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR, SCAN_ONLY, SCAN_AND_REPAIR. Default is NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR.

SYNTAX

beectl modify_virus_scan_policy [ --scanpolicy <virusscanpolicy> ]
 

OPTIONS

--scanpolicy

Virus scan policy. Default is NO_SCAN_OR_REPAIR.

EXAMPLES

<beectl modify_virus_scan_policy --scanpolicy SCAN_AND_REPAIR>

modify_workspace_template

Modifies an existing workspace template

SYNTAX

beectl modify_workspace_template --template <Full path of the template file> --file <{7}>
 

OPTIONS

--template

Workspace template identifier

--file

Full path of the template file

EXAMPLES

beectl modify_workspace_template --template wstp=test_team_ws_template,enpr=test_enterprise --file /tmp/template.xml

obfuscate

Obfuscates the prompted string.

SYNTAX

beectl obfuscate [--expiration_time_in_minutes 30]
 

OPTIONS

--expiration_time_in_minutes

Indicates the time in minutes for which obfuscated string should be valid for the use in this Beehive instance. If "0" is passed, obfuscated string will never expire.

EXAMPLES

beectl obfuscate

(Prompted)Enter the password : [User types in the password which is not echoed on the standard output].

recover_search_failures

Recover search failures. If scope is not specified, Recover search failures from all scopes.

SYNTAX

beectl recover_search_failures [--crawl <Recover crawl failures>] [--scope <Recover failures for this personal or team workspace scope>] [--start_date <Recover failures of entities modified on or after this date>] [--end_date <Recover failures of entities modified on or before this date>]
 

OPTIONS

--crawl

Recover crawl failures

--scope

Recover failures for this personal or team workspace scope

--start_date

Recover failures of entities modified on or after this date

--end_date

Recover failures of entities modified on or before this date

EXAMPLES

beectl recover_search_failures --crawl true --scope 4731:36F4:wspr:B886F81BB37C40708B773C94BF30B063000000000001 --start_date 2010-06-01T00:00:01 --end_date 2010-06-30T00:00:01

restart

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.

SYNTAX

beectl restart [ --component <component id> | --all | --serially]
 

OPTIONS

--component

Identifier of component to restart. To restart more than one component at a time, specify this option multiple times.

--all

restart all managed components.

--serially

It specified, restarts all the components one by one.

EXAMPLES

beectl restart --all

<option name="all" mandatory="false" data_type="BOOLEe4b86fd46f

send_broadcast_im_message

Sends Instant Message to all online users.

SYNTAX

beectl send_broadcast_im_message --from <IM address of user sending the message> [--subject Subject of the Instant Message to be sent to all online users] --message <Instant Message to be sent to all online users> 
 

OPTIONS

--from

IM address of user sending the message

--subject

Subject of the Instant Message to be sent to all online users

--message

Instant Message to be sent to all online users

EXAMPLES

beectl send_broadcast_im_message --from im:user1@example.com --subject announcement --message Hello

beectl send_broadcast_im_message --from im:user1@example.com --message Hello

start

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.

SYNTAX

beectl start [ --component <component id> | --all | --serially]
 

OPTIONS

--component

Identifier of component to start. To start more than one component at a time, specify this option multiple times.

--all

start all managed components.

--serially

It specified, starts all the components one by one.

EXAMPLES

beectl start --all

beectl start --component 5792bd5f-3b46-42de-a15d-8fe4b86fd46f

status

Displays the status of all managed components.

SYNTAX

beectl status [--dashboard | --detail] [--all_home_instances | --all_services | (--component <State manageable component>) ...  --all_disabled_components | [--disabled_beehive_instances] [--disabled_oc4js] [--disabled_service_instances] [--disabled_services] ]
 

OPTIONS

--dashboard

A dashboard view of all the specified components is shown.

--detail

A detailed view of all the specified components is shown.

--all_home_instances

Status of all Beehive instances is shown.

--all_services

Status of all Services is shown.

--component

Status of the specified components is shown.

--all_disabled_components

Lists all the disabled components in the system is shown.

--disabled_beehive_instances

Lists all the disabled beehive instances in the system is shown.

--disabled_oc4js

Lists all the disabled managed oc4js in the system is shown.

--disabled_service_instances

Lists all the disabled service instances in the system is shown.

--disabled_services

Lists all the disabled services in the system is shown.

EXAMPLES

beectl status

stop

Manages OC4J Instances, Beehive Transport Infrastructure Monitors and Oracle HTTP servers components. The command "beectl status" displays the component id and the status of these manageable components.

SYNTAX

beectl stop [ --component <component id> | --all | --serially]
 

OPTIONS

--component

Identifier of component to stop. To stop more than one component at a time, specify this option multiple times.

--all

stop all managed components.

--serially

It specified, stops all the components one by one.

EXAMPLES

beectl stop --all

beectl stop --component 5792bd5f-3b46-42de-a15d-8fe4b86fd46f

upload_apns_keystore

Uploads the provider file for Apple Push Notification Service.

SYNTAX

beectl upload_apns_keystore --file <path to the apns provider file>
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and file name of the .p12 file.

EXAMPLES

beectl upload_apns_keystore --file $BH/beehive/seed/push/anps.p12

upload_attendant_prompt

Upload a prompt to the database.

SYNTAX

beectl upload_attendant_prompt --name <name of attendant> --type <type of prompt> [--language <language of prompt>] --file <prompt file>
 

OPTIONS

--name

Name of the attendant.

--type

Type of the prompt. Can be one of language, menu, greeting, extension-prompt, extension-nomatch, option1, option2, option3, option4, option4, option5, option6, option7, option8, option9, noinput, noinput-term, nomatch, nomatch-term.

--language

Language of the prompt.

--file

Path to the prompt file.

EXAMPLES

beectl upload_attendant_prompt --name myAttendant --type menu --language en_US --file menu.wav

upload_client_application

Uploads client application binaries to the repository. Either a binary file path or path to a directory containing binary files should be specified.

SYNTAX

beectl upload_client_application { --file <path to the client binary> | --dir <full path to the directory containing the client binaries>}]
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and file name of the client ZIP file.

--dir

Specify the full path of the directory containing the client ZIP files.

EXAMPLES

beectl upload_client_application --file $BH/beehive/seed/dm/pushmail_debug.PPC5.0_ARM.element.zip

beectl upload_client_application --dir $BH/beehive/seed/dm/

upload_device_profiles

Uploads device profiles to the repository. An XML file or a directory containing XML files can be used as the source for the device profiles. The file can also contain device types and device profile schema.

SYNTAX

beectl upload_device_profiles { --file <Full file path of the device profiles XML file> | --dir <Full path of the directory containing device profiles XML files>}
 

OPTIONS

--file

Specify the full path and file name of the device profiles XML file.

--dir

Specify the full path of the directory containing the device profiles XML files.

EXAMPLES

beectl upload_device_profiles --file /tmp/device-profiles.xml

beectl upload_device_profiles --dir /tmp/device-profiles/

upload_language_pack

Loads language pack resources into the system.

SYNTAX

beectl upload_language_pack --source <source> [--ignore_version] [--suppress_warning] [--accept_builtin]
 

OPTIONS

--source

Source jar file containing one or more xliff files or one or more helpsets. Only a jar file is permitted as source value.

--ignore_version

Ignore version information in the xliff files; use with caution.

--suppress_warning

Suppress warnings about potential xliff problems; only report fatal errors.

--accept_builtin

Accept xliff files or helpsets marked as built-in. This option must be used only when necessary because uploading built-in xliff files or helpsets is typically a maintenance activity. In absence of this option the command will fail if a built-in xliff file or helpset is being uploaded - this behaviour has been designed to guard against accidentally uploading built-in xliff files or helpsets.

EXAMPLES

beectl upload_language_pack --source abc.jar

Add/modify the xliff file(s) or helpset(s) packaged in abc.jar to existing language pack. Command will fail if any .xlf or helpset is of filetype builtin. abc.jar is expected to package helpset(s) in the directory structure helpsets/<library_name>/custom/<locale>/<helpset.jar>. .xlf files (and associated .class files) must be packaged in langpack/xliff/custom/x.xlf and langpack/<java-package-tree>/x.class directories respectively. Command will fail if any .xlf does not contain version. The command will fail if the version of an .xlf file is prior to the version of corresponding .xlf file in existing language pack. Helpsets are not versioned hence all custom helpsets from abc.jar MUST overwrite custom helpsets of same name and same locale in same library in existing language pack.

beectl upload_language_pack --source abc.jar --accept_builtin

Add/modify the xliff file(s) or helpset(s) packaged in abc.jar to existing language pack. Command will process helpsets or xliff files of both filetypes - built-in and custom. abc.jar is expected to package helpset(s) in the directory structure helpsets/<library_name>/<filetype>/<locale>/<helpset.jar>. .xlf files (and associated .class files) must be packaged in langpack/xliff/<filetype>/x.xlf and langpack/<java-package-tree>/x.class directories respectively. Command will fail if any .xlf does not contain version. The command will fail if the version of an .xlf file is prior to the version of corresponding .xlf file in existing language pack.

beectl upload_language_pack --source abc.jar --ignore_version

Add/modify the xliff file(s) or helpset(s) packaged in abc.jar to existing language pack. Command will fail if any .xlf or helpset is of filetype builtin. abc.jar is expected to package helpset(s) in the directory structure helpsets/<library_name>/custom/<locale>/<helpset.jar>. .xlf files (and associated .class files) must be packaged in langpack/xliff/custom/x.xlf and langpack/<java-package-tree>/x.class directories respectively. Version info in xliff files is completely ignored i.e. all custom .xlf files from abc.jar WILL overwrite custom files of same name in existing language pack.

beectl upload_language_pack --source abc.jar --accept_builtin --ignore_version

Add/modify the xliff file(s) or helpset(s) packaged in abc.jar to existing language pack. Command will process helpsets or xliff files of both filetypes - built-in and custom. abc.jar is expected to package helpset(s) in the directory structure helpsets/<library_name>/<filetype>/<locale>/<helpset.jar>. .xlf files (and associated .class files) must be packaged in langpack/xliff/<filetype>/x.xlf and langpack/<java-package-tree>/x.class directories respectively. Version info in xliff files is completely ignored i.e. all custom .xlf files from abc.jar WILL overwrite custom files of same name in existing language pack.

validate_configuration

Validates the configuration for given component id or for the whole system model tree.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_configuration [ --id <system object id or alias of system object>]
 

OPTIONS

--id

component id.

EXAMPLES

beectl validate_configuration

Validates the whole configuration system model.

beectl validate_configuration --id a1d290a8-f8a7-46ea-ae3d-0696c0bde331

Validates the system model object identified by given id or alias.

validate_directory_entry

e> <s the directory entry in ldap with corresponding entry in beehive. The directory entry can be of type user, group or external person. The command provides an option to correct any data inconsistencies by applying necessary changes in beehive. The state of the profile specified in this command can either be ENABLE or DISABLE.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_directory_entry (  ([ --email <email>] | [ --identifier <bodn> ] | [ --dn <dn> ]    [ --verbose ] [ --timezone_update ])   | --all_users [ --timezone_update ] | --all_groups | --all | --delete |   --profile <Profile_name> [--commit] 
 

OPTIONS

--identifier

Identifier of the user, group or external-person in beehive

--email

Email-ID of the user, group or external-person.

--dn

DN(distinguished name) of the user, group or external-person in ldap directory

--commit

When Command is run with this option, it makes the changes in beehive database. The default is set to non-commit mode or no database changes.

--verbose

This option is used display the detailed information.

--profile

Name of the profile

--all_users

To reconcile all users.

--all_groups

To reconcile all groups.

--all

To reconcile all users and group.

--delete

To reconcile all deleted entries.

--timezone_update

To reconcile timezone.

EXAMPLES

beectl validate_directory_entry --email user1@example.com --profile exampleProfile --commit --verbose

beectl validate_directory_entry --dn cn=user2,cn=users,dc=example,dc=com --profile exampleProfile --commit --verbose

beectl validate_directory_entry --identifier user=user3@example.com --profile exampleProfile --verbose

beectl validate_directory_entry --all --profile exampleProfile

beectl validate_directory_entry --all_users --profile exampleProfile

beectl validate_directory_entry --all_groups --profile exampleProfile

validate_midtier

It validates midtier for various conditions. For example, it reports the issues of database connectivity with each individual rac node.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_midtier [--connection_string <connection string to validate>] [--schema_user <user having sysdba privilege>] [--schema_password <Password for user having sysdba privilege>]
 

OPTIONS

--connection_string

Configuration repository connect string.

--schema_user

Name of the user having sysdba privilege.

--schema_password

Password for user having sysdba privilege.

EXAMPLES

beectl validate_midtier

Above command will use the connection string and credentials available with boot strap configuration and validate the connectivity.

beectl validate_midtier --connection_string (DESCRIPTION=(ENABLE=BROKEN)(ADDRESS_LIST=(LOAD_BALANCE=on)(FAILOVER=on)(ADDRESS=(PROTOCOL=TCP)(HOST=1234.example.com)(PORT=1234)))(CONNECT_DATA=(SERVER=DEDICATED)(SERVICE_NAME=mydb.example.com))) --schema_user system --schema_password 1234dedrf2wddgeyeheteeddy

Above command will use the given connection string, credential for sys user and validate the connectivity

validate_policy

Evaluates or executes a policy based on an event payload file.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_policy --event_name <Event name.> --event_payload_file <Path to the event payload xml file.> --policy <The policy identifier.> { --evaluate <Evaluate this policy.> | --execute <Execute this policy.> }
 

OPTIONS

--event_name

Event name.

--event_payload_file

Path to the event payload xml file.

--policy

The policy identifier.

--evaluate

Evaluate this policy.

--execute

Execute this policy.

EXAMPLES

beectl validate_policy --event_name MyEventTypeName --event_payload_file MyEventPayloadFile.xml --policy MyPolicy --policy

validate_site_key

Validates the given site key.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_site_key --site_key <new site key>
 

OPTIONS

--site_key

Site key to be validated.

EXAMPLES

beectl validate_site_key --site_key 87hyhuh78e=122nddn356763yhd34bnh

validate_virus_scan_engine_connectivity

Tests the connectivity to the virus scan engine running at the specified host and port.

SYNTAX

beectl validate_virus_scan_engine_connectivity [ --hostname <scanengine_hostname> ] [ --port <scanengine_port> ]
 

OPTIONS

--hostname

Name of the host where the virus scan engine is installed. Default is localhost.

--port

Port number used by the virus scan engine for communication with its clients. Default is 1344.

EXAMPLES

<beectl validate_virus_scan_engine_connectivity --hostname scanenginehost.example.com --port 1344>

version

This command shows the version information of the Beehive products.

List of valid Beehive products is shown below. Use them as a value for the "product" option.

accesschecks

accesscontrol

admin

alarm

artifacts

audit

authn

beectl

beehivemail

bio

btimon

caldav

cms

collabcoex

common-framework

content

core

csi_r1

csi_r1-impl

cspi

discussions

dms

event

event-definitions

framework

ftp

im

jcr

management

mds

mgmtsvc

mobileclient

mobiledm

nms

oma

omb

owc

owc-stdmedia

platform

policy

presence

push

pushmail

rds

search

smpp

teamcollaboration

tms

tzs

uds

uss

version

virusscanner

voice

voip

webdav

wiki

workspaces

xbom

xmpp

xms

List of valid field names is shown below. Use them as a value for "field" option.

name

build_version

internal_version

internal_version_name

public_version

public_version_name

product_description

product_suite_association_ids

beectl version command output is fully customizable. The multi-valued "product" option can be used to get version information for a specified set of products. Similarly the multi-valued "field" option can be used to get the information about the specified set of fields only.

When multi-valued product and field options are used, beectl version command display order is same as the order specified for product and field options in command line.

SYNTAX

beectl version [--all | [[--product <Product Name>] ...]] [[--field <Field Name>]...]
 

OPTIONS

--all

Shows version information for all products.

--product

Shows version information for the specified products. This option is multi-valued.

--field

Shows the value of the specified fields. This option is multi-valued.

EXAMPLES

beectl version --all

The above command will list the version information about all the products.

beectl version --product uds --field internal_version --field internal_version_name --field product_suite_association_ids

The above command will list internal_version, internal_version_name and product_suite information for the user directory service component.